JP6960174B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, a start port and a large winning opening are provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a special symbol display when the game ball wins a prize at the starting opening, and a big hit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating the result of the lottery, the jackpot game state is favorable to the player. When the special symbol is variablely displayed, the game effect is performed by the lighting / blinking operation of the image displayed on the image display device, the sound output from the speaker, and the light emitting body such as the lamp.

Such a gaming machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control board that controls the game effect using an image display device or an accessory. The main control board transmits control commands according to the progress of the game to the effect control board, and the effect control board determines the effect content based on the control commands received from the main control board.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-052748

By the way, in this type of gaming machine, if the main control board and the effect control board are not smoothly linked, the interest of the game may be impaired.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly coordinating between a main control board and an effect control board.

The present invention has the following configurations. The reference numerals indicate an example of the correspondence with the components shown in the drawings in order to promote understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
The present invention has a variable winning means (large winning opening 13a) in which a game ball launched into the game area (4a) can be changed to an open state in which a prize can be won, and a variable display of a symbol is executed when a starting condition is satisfied. , The main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of performing the special game in which the variable winning means is operated in the open state a plurality of times when the variable display becomes a special result. The main control means (110) is provided with the effect control means (130) for controlling the effect using the effect execution means (9,16,17,18,23,27), and the main control means (110) is determined by the establishment of the acquisition condition. An acquisition means for acquiring determination information, a storage means capable of storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and storage and retention of game information even in a power interruption state in which power supply to the game machine (1) is stopped. It has a possible holding means and a transmitting means for transmitting a control command, the effect executing means (16) displays an effect image based on the control command, and the main control means (110) displays the effect image. When the power is supplied to the game machine (1) from the disconnected state, the first control command (power restoration designation command) can be transmitted based on the game information stored and held in the holding means, and the special It is possible to transmit a second control command (opening designation command) indicating that the game is executed and a third control command (round designation command) indicating that the round game is executed a predetermined number of times. In (16), the first image (color bar image) is displayed when the power is cut off, and when the first control command is received while the first image is displayed, the second image (16) is displayed. When the display is switched to the display of (power restoration in progress image) and the second control command is received while the second image is being displayed, a notification image for notifying that a special game corresponding to the second control command is executed is performed. While switching to the display of (opening effect image), if the first control command is not received and the second control command is received while the first image is being displayed, the second image is not displayed. The display of the first image is switched to the display of the notification image (opening effect image) for notifying that the special game according to the second control command is executed, and when the first image is displayed, the first image is displayed. When a control command is received, the display is switched to the second image (image during power restoration), and when the third control command is received while the second image is being displayed, a predetermined round is displayed. While switching to the display of the effect image, if the first control command is not received and the third control command is received while the first image is being displayed, the first image is not displayed and the first control command is received. The feature is that the display of the image is switched to the display of an image different from the round effect image.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control board and the effect control board.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged front view of the game information display device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the game control device. It is a block diagram of an image control unit. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing control table of a big prize opening. It is a figure which shows the game state setting data table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state. (1) A hit determination table for ordinary symbols, (2) a stop symbol determination table for ordinary symbols, (3) a variation pattern determination table for ordinary symbols, and (4) an opening mode determination table for the second start port are shown. It is a figure. It is a flowchart of the main processing by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the input control process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the 1st start port detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the 2nd start port detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the gate detection switch input process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of the special figure special electric control processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a special symbol memory determination process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special symbol stop processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot game process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special game end processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the general electric control process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of ordinary symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of auxiliary game processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of data creation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of output control processing by a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing of various commands transmitted from a main control board to an effect control board. It is a flowchart of the main processing by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of the special figure hold memory update process by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of the variation effect pattern determination process by an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the data creation process by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the data output processing by an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the variation display of a special symbol in the special symbol 1st display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the display result which is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 1st display and the special symbol 2nd indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by an image control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing by an image control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the V blank interrupt processing by an image control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an animation pattern by an image control unit. It is a figure which shows the schematic diagram of the image drawing by the drawing control unit. It is a figure which shows the image display before and after power-on during the variation display of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the image display before and after the power restoration during the variation display of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the image which is drawn and the image which is actually displayed when the effect control board normally receives a power recovery designation command from a main control board after power restoration and then receives other commands. It is a figure which shows the image which is drawn and the image which is actually displayed when the effect control board receives other commands without normally receiving a power restoration designation command from a main control board after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the special symbol memory designation command is received without receiving the power restoration designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the fluctuation pattern specification command is received without receiving the power restoration designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the special symbol confirmation command is received without receiving the power restoration designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the opening designation command is received without receiving the power restoration designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the round designation command is received without receiving the power recovery designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the ending specification command is received without receiving the power restoration designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the error specification command is received without receiving the power restoration designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the image display when the opening designation command is received during the variation display of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the image display when the round designation command is received during the variation display of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the image display when the ending designation command is received during the variation display of a special symbol. It is a flowchart of the main processing by a lamp control unit. It is a flowchart of the initialization process by a lamp control unit. It is a flowchart of the accessory initial operation processing by a lamp control unit. It is a flowchart of the accessory production execution determination processing by a lamp control unit. It is a flowchart of the accessory production process by a lamp control unit. It is a figure which shows the initial operation and the effect operation of the initial operation pattern of a movable effect member. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of the movable effect member and the display mode of an image display when a power restoration designation command is normally received after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the timing chart corresponding to FIG. 72. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of the movable effect member, and the display mode of an image display when the power restoration designation command is normally received after the power restoration. It is a figure which shows the timing chart corresponding to FIG. 74. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of the movable effect member, and the display mode of an image display at the time of receiving a special symbol memory designation command without normally receiving a power recovery designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the timing chart corresponding to FIG. 76. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of the movable effect member, and the display mode of an image display when a round designation command is received without normally receiving a power recovery designation command after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the timing chart corresponding to FIG. 78.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.
In the pachinko gaming machine as the game machine 1, the opening / closing frame 2B (inner frame) is freely attached to the outer frame 2A attached to the island structure of the game hall, and the opening / closing door 3 is openably / closably attached to the opening / closing frame 2B. ing. A window 3a is formed on the opening / closing door 3, and a transparent plate 3b is attached to the window 3a. The left end of the opening / closing door 3 is rotatably supported around the vertical axis at the left end of the opening / closing frame 2B, and a key cylinder 3c that locks the opening / closing door 3 to the opening / closing frame 2 is attached to the right end of the opening / closing door 3. Has been done. A game board 4 is attached to the opening / closing frame 2B, a game area 4a through which a game ball can flow down is formed between the game board 4 and the transparent plate 3b on the front side thereof, and the game area 4a is opened / closed by the opening / closing door 3. ..

The opening / closing door 3 has an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker on the upper side of the window 3a, a frame lighting device 27 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a storage plate 5 (receiver) for storing game balls on the lower side of the window 3a. ) Is provided, and the effect button device 6A and the selection button device 6B that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects are provided side by side on the storage plate 5.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the opening / closing door 3, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like to produce sound by music and audio. Further, the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 27 are provided on the peripheral portion of the window 3a, and the illumination is performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each of the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs). Performs light emission production. Further, the frame lighting device 27 is a notification LED controlled to light / blink when the opening / closing door 3 is opened or a payout abnormality occurs in which the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 100 (see FIG. 2). It has.

The effect button device 6A includes an effect button 6a capable of performing a determination operation (operation input) and a button operation effect, an effect button detection switch 6b (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the effect button 6a, and an effect. A button drive motor 6c (see FIG. 4) for changing the button 6a into a normal state and a protruding state located above the normal state, and a vibration state in which the effect button 6a vibrates in a predetermined state and a normal state. A button vibration motor 6d (see FIG. 3) for causing the effect and a button light emitting LED 6e (see FIG. 3) for changing the effect button 6a into a quenching state and a light emitting state for emitting light in a predetermined mode are provided. By operating the effect button 6a, the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

The selection button device 6B includes a cross key button 6f (hereinafter, cross key 6f) (up key button, down key button, right key button, left key button) as a selection button capable of performing operations such as selection operation. , A cross key detection switch 6g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 6f is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1 by operating the cross key 6f. ..

A firing handle 7 is attached to the lower right side of the storage plate 5. When the launch handle 7 is rotated, the game balls introduced at the launch position are launched from the storage plate 5, and when a plurality of game balls are stored in the storage plate 5, the plurality of game balls are approximately 0. It is fired continuously at 6 second intervals. The launched game ball is guided by the guide rail 8 and introduced into the upper part of the game area 4a. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the launch stop button (not shown) provided on the launch handle 7.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, in the game area 4a, in addition to a large number of obstacle nails K, a first starting port 10, a starting port device 11 having an opening / closing second starting port 11a, a gate 12, and an opening / closing type The large winning opening device 13 having the large winning opening 13a and the plurality of general winning openings 14 are each provided in the arrangement shown in the drawing so that a game ball can be entered (winning). The first starting port 10, the gate 12, and the plurality of general winning openings 14 are respectively provided with a first starting opening detection switch 10a, a gate detection switch 12a, and a plurality of general winning opening detection switches 14a for detecting a game ball that has entered. It is attached. In the embodiment, the terms "winning ball" and "winning" include "passing".

The start port device 11 opens and closes the second start port 11a, the opening / closing member 11b for opening / closing the second starting port 11a, the second starting port detection switch 11c for detecting the game ball winning in the second starting port 11a, and the opening / closing member 11b. The second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d for driving is provided, and the second starting port 11a can operate in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win.

The large winning opening device 13 opens and closes the large winning opening 13a, the opening / closing member 13b for opening / closing the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening detection switch 13c for detecting the game ball winning in the large winning opening 13a, and the large opening / closing member 13b. The winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is provided, and the large winning opening 13a can operate in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the launch handle 7 to launch the game ball into the game area 4a, the game ball is launched by the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the launch handle 7. By adjusting the strength, it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "right-handed". In "left-handed", the game ball falls in the left game area 4a1 located on the left side of the center accessory 15, and in "right-handed", the game ball passes through the right-handed passage formed on the upper side of the center accessory 15. It moves to the right side game area 4a2 side located on the right side of the center accessory 15, and falls toward the downstream direction of the right side game area 4a2.

When the game ball launched into the game area 4a wins any of a plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14, the winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 for each winning of the game ball. A set number of game balls (several to ten or more) were paid out to the storage plate 5 as prize balls, and none of the plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 was awarded. In this case, it is finally discharged to the outside of the game area 4a from the discharge port 28 formed in the most downstream portion of the game area 4a.

When the game ball wins the starting openings 10 and 11a, a big hit lottery (special game determination) is performed, and when the big hit lottery is won, a big hit game (special game) in which the big winning opening 13a opens occurs. When the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery is performed, and when the winning lottery is won, an auxiliary game is generated in which the second starting port 11a is opened in a predetermined mode.

A center accessory 15 is attached to the substantially center of the game board 4. The center accessory 15 is provided with a frame body (decorative frame body) 15a that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside, and the frame body 15a is fitted and mounted in an opening (not shown) formed in the game board 4. A warp device 15b is provided on the left side of the frame body 15a so that a game ball flowing down the game area 4a can be introduced into the frame body 15a. A center stage 15c on which the game ball can roll is provided at the lower part of the frame body 15a, and the game ball introduced inside the frame body 15a by the warp device 15b passes through the warp passage of the warp device 15b and is passed through the center stage 15c. It rolls with and flows down below the frame body 15a.

A first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided on the central inner part side of the effect space 15A defined inside the frame body 15a of the center accessory 15, and is on the upper side of the effect space 15A. On the upper side of the production space 15A, there is a second image consisting of a first movable production member 17A (directing accessory) that imitates a "sword" and a liquid crystal display that imitates the "signature" of the title of the game machine 1. A second movable effect member 17B (effect accessory) having a display device 18 (sub liquid crystal display) is provided, and the second movable effect member 17B is arranged in front of the first movable effect member 17A. Further, on the right side of the effect space 15A, a third movable effect member 17C (effect) that imitates a "sword" having a size larger than the "sword" of the first movable effect member 17A is provided.

The first movable effect member 17A is composed of a sheath portion 17a1 imitating a sheath and a blade portion 17a2 housed in the sheath portion 17a1, and the blade portion 17a2 is driven by a stepping motor to move in the left-right direction. It is possible to perform an effect operation in which the blade portion 17a2 is moved to the left and the blade portion 17a2 is pulled out from the sheath portion 17a1 from the state where the blade portion 17a2 is housed in the sheath portion 17a1 (FIG. 72 (2)).

The second movable effect member 17B can move in the vertical direction by being driven by a stepping motor, moves downward from the upper side of the effect space 15A, and appears on the front side of the display unit of the image display device 16. It is possible to perform an operation (see FIG. 72 (7)).

The third movable effect member 17C is composed of a sheath portion imitating a sheath and a blade portion housed in the sheath portion, and the blade portion can be moved in the vertical direction by being driven by the board drive device 17. This is possible, and from the state in which the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion, the blade portion can be moved up and down to perform an effect operation in which the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion (see FIG. 73 (4)). In FIG. 1, the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion.

Further, the third movable effect member 17C can tilt the blade portion with the lower end portion of the movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum by being driven by the panel drive device 17, and the blade portion can be tilted from the state where the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion. , It is possible to perform an effect operation such as tilting toward the front side of the central region of the display unit of the first image display device 16 and slashing the opponent with a sword.

Further, the third movable effect member 17C is driven by a stepping motor and can tilt the blade portion 17c2 with the lower part of the third movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum. It is possible to perform an effect operation such as tilting toward the front side of the central region of the display unit of the image display device 16 and slashing the opponent with a sword (see FIG. 72 (8)).

Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C are provided with a panel lighting device 18 having a plurality of LEDs, and are predetermined during standby or during execution of the effect operation. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect in which the blade, logo, etc. emit light depending on the mode.

The first image display device 16 performs various effect displays according to the progress (development) of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting effect performed while the special symbol variable display is not executed on the special symbol display described later, a variable effect that produces a special symbol variable display on the special symbol display, and a jackpot game are being executed. There is a big hit production etc. performed in.

The display unit of the first image display device 16 has a variable display area (left side area, center area, right side area) for displaying three effect symbols 16a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and progress of the variable effect. A mode display area or the like indicating the effect mode according to the above is formed.

The effect symbol 16a includes an identification unit consisting of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "1" to "9", and a character image or decoration attached to the periphery (neighborhood) of the identification unit. It may be composed of a decorative part composed of predetermined decorative information (accompanying information) such as a frame image, or may be composed of only an identification part.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 16a, the effect symbol 16a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery (special game determination). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777", and the loss mode is another mode.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, and switching or rotation (rotation) on the spot, etc. It may be.

Further, during the execution of the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, various effect images (moving images) such as a background image and a character are displayed according to the result of the big hit lottery (special game determination). Therefore, the player's expectation for the big hit lottery is increasing.

The display unit of the first image display device 16 has a first hold icon display area 16b for displaying a number of first hold icons (for example, "○") corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1). 2 The second hold icon display area 16c for displaying the number of second hold icons (for example, “●”) corresponding to the special figure hold number (U2), and the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) being executed. The variable icon display area 16d or the like for displaying the variable icon (for example, “⊚”) corresponding to the above is formed.

Further, on the display unit of the first image display device 16, a first reserved number display area 16e for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and a current second special symbol are displayed. To display the second reserved number display area 16f for displaying the second reserved number indicating the symbol reserved number (U2), the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol that is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the effect symbol. The special symbol display area TZ of is formed.

The special symbol is composed of only the identification unit consisting of the sign information of the numbers "1" to "9", and is displayed as a reduced symbol whose display size is smaller than that of the effect symbol. The variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display area TZ has a certain display mode (numbers are switched in order) during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol to the stop display. The display mode) is continuously performed, and the display is always visible without disappearing from the screen or being shielded by the effect operation of the movable effect member 17.
On the other hand, the variable display of the effect symbol may become invisible from the screen as the effect progresses. The variable display of the special symbol corresponds to the variable display of the effect symbol, and since it continues to be displayed in a visible state regardless of the progress of the effect, it also has a function as a variable display of the effect symbol.

Further, the display of the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 16e and 16f is not obscured by the effect operation of the movable effect member 17 or disappears from the screen as in the special symbol, and is always visually recognized. Displayed as possible.

The first hold icon display area 16b is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. -On the fourth display unit, the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) is displayed.

The second hold icon display area 16c is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. -The number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) is displayed on the fourth display unit.

The second image display device 18 can be operated in a predetermined direction by a panel drive device 17 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like.
Specifically, between the standby position (first position) located near the upper end of the first image display device 16 and the effect position (second position) located near the center of the first image display device 16. By moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction, the movement effect is performed. The movement direction of the second image display device 18 may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 6a.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the opening / closing frame 2B and the game board 4, a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, etc. The game ball storage unit 101 that stores the game balls supplied from the device and supplies the game balls to the payout device 100, the main control device 110A that incorporates the main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game in an integrated manner, and the payout from the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a control command, an effect control unit 130 that controls an effect according to an effect control command from the main control board 110, and an image control unit 140. And the effect control device 130A with a built-in lamp control unit 150, the power supply device 160A with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices 110A to 130A, and the outside of the game machine 1 (information collection of hall computers, etc.). The device) is provided with a game information output terminal plate 90 or the like for outputting game information (game signal). Further, the power supply board 160 is provided with a power plug 161 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 90 is provided, which is provided on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire effect control device 130A from the rear, and the other left and right sides open and close in the left and right directions. The effect control device 130A includes the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 90, the image display devices 16 and 18, and various lighting devices (panel lighting device 23, frame). A changeover switch for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount (emission intensity) of the lighting device 27) is provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, a first game information display device 19 for displaying game information related to the progress of the game is provided on the lower left outside the game area 4a and outside the guide rail 8 on the outside of the game board 4. Has been done.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the first game information display device 19 has a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in four inclined rows along the left end and the lower end of the outer guide rail 8 and the game board 4. have. These plurality of (32) LEDs (light emitting units) include a first special symbol first display 19a, a second special symbol first display 19b, a normal symbol first display 19c, and a first special symbol hold first display. Instrument 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 2nd indicator 19e, normal symbol hold 1st indicator 19f, high probability game status indicator 19g, time saving game status indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed 1st indicator 19j, the setting display 19k is configured.
As shown in FIG. 4, the first game information display device 19 is controlled by the main control board 110.

The first special symbol 1st display 19a is composed of 6 LEDs (light emitting units), and a big hit lottery of the 1st special symbol is performed on the condition that a game ball wins (wins) in the 1st starting port 10. Then, on the first special symbol 1st display 19a, 6 LEDs (light emitting units) blink at predetermined intervals or in order, and the variable display of the 1st special symbol is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is shown after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the first special symbol in which the LED (light emitting unit) is lit in the combination (big hit mode, lost mode) is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is notified. In the case of a big hit, the type of big hit, which will be described later, can be identified by the combination lighting display of the six LEDs.

The second special symbol 1st display 19b is composed of 6 LEDs (light emitting units), and a big hit lottery for the 2nd special symbol is performed on the condition that a game ball wins (wins) in the 2nd starting port 11a. Then, on the second special symbol 1st display 19b, 6 LEDs (light emitting parts) blink at predetermined intervals or in order to perform variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the result of the jackpot lottery after a predetermined time elapses. The second special symbol whose LED (light emitting unit) is lit is stopped and displayed in the combination (big hit mode, lost mode) indicating the above, and the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is notified. In the case of a big hit, the type of big hit, which will be described later, can be identified by the combination lighting display of the six LEDs.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means a state in which the jackpot game state is determined to be executed in the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol. The "big hit game state" is an opening game, a round game in which the big winning opening 13a is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined mode, and a predetermined number of round games (for example, 4 times, 16 times, etc.). It refers to a game state in which an ending game indicating the end of a jackpot game is performed from the end.

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 13a in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are inserted in the large winning opening 13a even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins, one round game ends. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated.

The normal symbol first display 19c is composed of three LEDs (light emitting units), and when a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12, the normal symbol first display 19c Then, the three LEDs (light emitting units) are displayed in a variable manner with a normal symbol blinking at a predetermined interval or in order, and the LEDs are lit in a combination (hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery after the lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the normal symbol is performed and the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is notified. In the case of winning, the type of winning, which will be described later, can also be determined by the combination lighting display of the three LEDs.

The first special symbol hold 1 display 19d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of first special symbol hold stored when a game ball wins in the first start port 10. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first special figure reservations. It should be noted that the first special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

The second special symbol reservation first display 19e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of second special symbol reservations stored when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and is lit or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second special figure reservations. It should be noted that the maximum number of 2nd special figure reservations is stored up to 4, but the number may be less than 4.

The normal symbol hold first display 19f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is for displaying the number of normal symbol hold, which is the number of normal symbol hold stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved drawings is stored up to four, the number may be less than four.

Regarding the number of 1st special symbol hold, 2nd special figure hold, and normal figure hold number, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f Both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the number of holds is "0", only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the number of holds is "1", etc. Only one LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of hold is "2", both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of hold is "3", and both LEDs (light emission) Part) flashes to notify that the number of holds is "4".

The high-probability gaming state display 19g is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying that the high-probability gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state described later, and when the high-probability gaming state is reached. The LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting, the lighting display of the LED (light emitting unit) continues during the high-probability gaming state, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off when the high-probability gaming state ends.

The time-saving game state display 19h is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying that the time-saving game state is in the time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability game state). When the time-saving game state is reached, the LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light during the time-saving game state, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off when the time-saving game state ends.

In the high-probability time-saving game state, both the LEDs (light emitting units) of the high-probability game state display 19a and the time-saving game state display 19h are turned on. In the low-probability time-saving game state, the LED (light emitting unit) of the time-saving game state indicator 19h lights up. In the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the LEDs (light emitting units) of the high-probability game state display 10a and the time-saving game state display 19h do not light up.

The round number display 19i is composed of seven LEDs (light emitting units) and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big hit state (special game state) occurs, and the number of rounds is set in a predetermined mode at the start of the big hit game. The LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting at, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light during the jackpot game, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, the 4th to 6th LEDs (light emitting parts) from the top light up, and if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, the 1st and 3rd from the top. The third and sixth LEDs (light emitting parts) light up. That is, the number of rounds is displayed by a combination of turning on and off each of the seven LEDs (light emitting units) determined in advance for each number of rounds.

The right-handed first display 19j is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying whether or not the so-called "right-handed" for launching a game ball into the right game area 4a2 is in a recommended state. When the game state is "short-time game state", or when a jackpot game (special game) is being performed, that is, when "right-handed" is recommended, the LED lights up. However, when right-handed is not recommended (that is, so-called "left-handed" is recommended), the LED is turned off.

The right-handed first display 19j starts lighting the LED (light emitting part) at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game regardless of the type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot), and the LED (light emitting part) is started during the jackpot game. The light emitting unit) is continuously lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off when the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, which shifts after the jackpot game ends, ends. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is won during the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light. Further, if the state does not shift to the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state after the big hit game, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off after the big hit game is completed. That is, once the LED (light emitting unit) is started to be lit, the right-handed first display 19j continues to light the LED (light emitting unit) until the game state in which the right-handed first indicator is to be struck is completed. ..

The setting display 19k is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying whether or not the gaming machine has a setting in which the winning probability of the jackpot lottery fluctuates. In this case, the LED (light emitting unit) lights up.
Here, in the case of a gaming machine with settings, for example, a combination of jackpot winning probabilities is installed in three stages, setting 1: 1 / 159.8 (1/50), setting 2: 1 / 154.2, setting 3 : 1 / 150.7. As a gaming machine with settings, it may be mounted in 4 stages or 6 stages.

As shown in FIG. 1, game information relating to the progress of the game is located outside the game area 4a and below the first game information display device 19 at the lower left outside the guide rail 8 outside the game board 4. A second game information display device 20 for displaying is provided.
As shown in FIG. 3B, the second game information display device 20 has a plurality of (10) LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in a triangular shape. These plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) include a first special symbol second indicator 20a, a second special symbol second indicator 20b, a normal symbol second indicator 20c, a first special symbol holding second indicator 20d, and a first. 2 The special symbol holding second display 20e, the normal symbol holding second display 20f, and the right-handed second display 20g are configured.
As shown in FIG. 4, the second game information display device 20 is controlled by the effect control board 130.

The first special symbol second display 20a is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) blinks with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol first display 19a. Is started, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues blinking during the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol first display 19a, the LED is turned on or off to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.
When the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variable display is started after the jackpot game is completed.
If the winner is lost in the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The second special symbol second display 20b is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) blinks as the second special symbol starts to fluctuate on the second special symbol first display 19b. Is started, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues blinking during the variable display of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped on the first display 19b of the second special symbol, the LED is turned on or off to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol.
When the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variable display is started after the jackpot game is completed.
If the prize is lost in the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The display of the first special symbol 2nd display 20a or the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20b is the first effect symbol 16a displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 16 at the center. Since it is the fourth effect symbol following the second effect symbol 16a displayed in the area and the third effect symbol 16a displayed in the right area, it may be called the fourth effect symbol.
The fluctuation start timing and fluctuation stop timing of the first and second special symbol second displays 20a and 20b are synchronized with the fluctuation start timing and fluctuation stop timing of the effect symbol 16a displayed on the first image display device 16. doing.

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol 1st display 19a is started, and the effect control board 130 receives the command. Display control data is created based on the setting of special symbol variation display data in the effect control unit 130 m of 130, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the first When the variation display on the special symbol second display 20a is started and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, the effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110. , Display control data is created based on the setting of the special symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20 to display the first special symbol second. The fluctuation of the vessel 20a stops.
The display mode of the second special symbol second display 20b is also the same as the above-mentioned display mode of the first special symbol second display 20a.

The mode (lighting or extinguishing) of the special symbol 1st display 19a, 19b when the special symbol is stopped is determined according to the special symbol variation pattern designation command, and the effect control is performed according to the end of the variation display of the special symbol. The board 130 may be stopped in a predetermined display mode of the effect symbol.

The normal symbol second display 20c is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) starts blinking with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 19c, and the normal symbol is started to blink. The LED (light emitting unit) keeps blinking during the fluctuation display of. Then, the LED turns on or off as the fluctuation of the normal symbol first display 19c stops, and the result of the winning lottery for the normal symbol is notified.
When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variable display is started after the winning game is completed.
If the lottery for winning a normal symbol is lost, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The effect control board 130 receives a command for specifying a normal symbol variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 19c is started, and the effect control of the effect control board 130. Display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol variation display data in the unit 130 m, and the created display control data is output to the normal symbol second display 20c, so that the normal symbol second display is displayed. When the variation display of 20c is started and the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped, the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130 m of the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol confirmation command. Display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the normal symbol second display 20c fluctuates. Stops.

The first special symbol holding second display 20d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the first special symbol holding first display 19d described above, and a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 10. The purpose is to display the number of 1st special figure reservations, which is the number of 1st special figure reservations stored in the case of a sphere), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of 1st special figure reservations. It should be noted that the first special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

Regarding the number of 1st special figure hold, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the number of hold is "0", and only one of the LEDs (light emitting part) is turned on and the number of hold is "1". That is, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of holds is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting parts) are lit and the number of holds is "3". Both LEDs (light emitting units) flash to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of first special symbol hold increases or decreases, and the effect control unit 130 m of the effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol hold display data. Display control data is created based on the setting of, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20 to display (light up) the first special symbol hold second display 20d. , Blinking or turning off) is performed.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasure (off) timing of the first special symbol hold second display 20d are synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of the first hold icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , It is synchronized with the numerical change timing of the first hold number display area 16e.

The second special symbol holding second display 20e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned second special symbol holding first display 19e, and a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 11a. The purpose is to display the number of 2nd special figure holdings, which is the number of 2nd special figure holdings stored in the case of (sphere), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of 2nd special figure holdings. It should be noted that the maximum number of 2nd special figure reservations is stored up to 4, but the number may be less than 4.

Regarding the second special figure hold number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the hold number is "0", and only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the hold number is "1". That is, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of holds is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting parts) are lit and the number of holds is "3". Both LEDs (light emitting units) flash to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol memory designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of second special symbol hold increases or decreases, and the effect control unit 130 m sets the second special symbol hold display data. Display control data is created based on the above, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20 to display (light, blink, or turn off) the second special symbol hold second display 20e. Is done.

The display (lighting / blinking) timing and the erasure (off) timing of the second special symbol hold 2 display 20e are synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of the second hold icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , It is synchronized with the numerical change timing of the second reserved number display area 16f.

The normal symbol hold second display 20f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned normal symbol hold first display 19f, and is stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It is for displaying the number of holdings of the normal figure, which is the number of holdings of the normal figure, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of holdings of the normal figure. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved drawings is stored up to four, the number may be less than four.

The effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of normal symbol hold increases or decreases, and the effect control unit 130 m displays the normal symbol hold display data based on the setting. The control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20 to display (light, blink, or turn off) the normal symbol hold second display 20f.

Regarding the number of holdings in the normal figure, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the number of holdings is "0", and only one of the LEDs (light emitting part) is turned on and the number of holdings is "1". That, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of holdings is "2", both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of holdings is "3", both The LED (light emitting unit) blinks to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The right-handed second display 20g is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and when the gaming state becomes the "high probability time saving gaming state" or the "low probability time saving gaming state", the second starting port 11a is placed in the right gaming area 4a2. Since "right-handed" is recommended due to the board structure provided with, the LED is started to be lit and the LED is continued to be lit until the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state ends. Then, when the gaming state is the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state", the LED does not light because "left-handed" is recommended due to the board structure in which the first starting port 10 is provided in the left gaming area 4a1. ..

Specifically, when the game is controlled in the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the effect control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130 m strikes right. A display control command is created based on the display data being set, and the created display control command is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the display of the right-handed second display 20g is started. , The effect control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game state is changed, and the game state is not the low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state in the effect control unit 130m. When it is determined that the right-handed erasure data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the right-handed second display 20 g is displayed. To finish.

When the right-handed second display 20g is in the "big hit game state", the LED is turned on because the "right-handed" is recommended due to the board structure in which the big winning opening 13a is provided in the right game area 4a2. The LED continues to light until the jackpot game state ends.

Specifically, when the jackpot game (opening) is started, the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130 m sets the right-handed display data. When a display control command is created based on the above, and the created display control command is output to the second game status display device 20, the display of the right-handed second display 20 g is started and the game status is changed. The effect control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130 m determines that the game state is not a low-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or a jackpot game state. The right-handed erasure data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the display of the right-handed second display 20g is completed.

Here, there is a notation of "right-handed" in the vicinity (upper side) of the right-handed second display 20 g, and when the LED (light emitting part) of the right-handed second display 20 g lights up, "right-handed" is recommended. It is clearly shown that it is in the state of being. Therefore, the right-handed display is easier for the player to see than the right-handed first display 19j of the first game information display device 19 in which nothing is written.

The second game information display device 20 may be provided closer to the first image display device 16 than the first game information display device 19. In this case, since the second game information display device 20 is in a prominent position with respect to the player, the second game information display device 20 is easier to see than the first game information display device 19.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the effect control board 130 that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the effect control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be sent to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning port detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 12a, a first starting port detection switch 10a, a second starting port detection switch 11c, a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d, and a large winning port. Detection switch 13c, large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, magnetic detection sensor 58a, radio wave detection sensor 58b, RAM clear switch 58c, setting key switch 58d, winning confirmation detection switch 58e, first special symbol first display 19a, second special Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state Display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, setting display 19k, game information output terminal board 90, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 are connected. There is.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main RAM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. Thereby, in order to control the control process according to the detection signal from various input devices (detection switch, detection sensor, etc.) and various output devices (solenoid, various indicators 19a to 19k of the first game information display device 19, etc.). Control processing, control processing for transmitting and receiving various control commands, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside (hall computer, etc.) of the game machine 1 via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.
The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open / close detection switch 31a of the opening / closing door 3, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 100, and a game from the payout device 100. A payout motor 100b for paying out the balls and a ball presence detection switch 101a for detecting that the game balls are stored are connected to the game ball storage unit 101.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 100 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input / output port, and the like. A ball feed solenoid 43, a touch sensor 7a, a firing volume 7b, a firing solenoid 26a, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 7 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 7a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 43 and the launch solenoid 26a to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 7 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 7b, the ball feed solenoid 43 is driven and the launch solenoid has a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 7. The 26a is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control board 130 displays an image based on the effect control unit 130 m that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command 130 m from the effect control unit 130 m. Lamp control that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (solenoids, motors, etc.) based on the reception of the effect control commands from the image control unit 140 that controls the audio output and the effect control unit 130 m. The unit 150 is provided.

The effect control unit 130 m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.
The input / output port of the effect control unit 130 m has an effect button detection switch 6b, a cross key detection switch 6 g, a first special symbol second display 20a, a second special symbol second display 20b, and a normal symbol second display 20c. , The first special symbol holding second display 20d, the second special symbol second display 20e, the normal symbol holding second display 20f, and the right-handed second display 20g are connected.

The sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130 m reads the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b in response to the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, control processing for transmitting an effect control command based on the determination result to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing according to the detection signal of the above, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, various indicators 20a to 20g of the second game information display device 20, etc.) are performed.

(Structure of image control unit)
Here, the configuration of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image control unit 140.
The image control unit 140 controls the image display of the image display devices 16 and 18 and the sound of the sound output device 9. Therefore, the control CPU 141, the control RAM 142, the control ROM 143, the CGROM 144, the crystal oscillator 145, the VRAM 146, and the VDP (Video Display Processor). ) 200 (drawing control unit) is provided. The VDP 200 includes a voice control circuit 300 for controlling the voice output in the gaming machine 1.

The general CPU 141 instructs the VDP 200 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 144 on the image display devices 16 and 18 based on the effect pattern designation command to be described later received from the effect control unit 130 m. Such an instruction is given by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.
Further, when the control CPU 141 receives the V blank interrupt signal or the drawing end signal from the VDP 200, the integrated CPU 141 performs interrupt processing as appropriate.
Further, the control CPU 141 also instructs the voice control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 to output the music or voice based on the predetermined voice data to the voice output device 9 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 130 m. I do.
The centralized RAM 142 is built in the centralized CPU 141, functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the centralized CPU 141, and temporarily stores the data read from the centralized ROM 143.

Further, the control ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, and is used to generate a control processing program of the control CPU 141, a symbol array information in which the symbol number of the effect symbol 16a and the type of the effect symbol 16a are associated with each other, and a display list. The display list generation program, the animation pattern for displaying the animation of the production pattern, the animation scene information, and the like are stored.
The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, the animation scene information stores information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and the like. doing.

The CGROM 144 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of an image.
Further, the CGROM 144 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression.
The CGROM 144 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. In addition, a large amount of voice data is also stored in the CGROM 144.

The crystal oscillator 145 outputs a pulse signal to the clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200, and by dividing the pulse signal, the system clock and image display devices 16 and 18 for the VDP 200 to control the clock generation circuit 205. A synchronization signal or the like for synchronizing with is generated.

The VRAM 146 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data.
Further, the VRAM 146 draws or displays an image, a display list storage area 146a for temporarily storing the display list output from the control CPU 141, and an expansion storage area 146b for storing the image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206. It has a first frame buffer 146c and a second frame buffer 146d for the purpose. Palette data is also stored in the VRAM 146. The first and second frame buffers 146c and 146d alternately switch between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, which reads image data from any of the first and second frame buffers 146c and 146d (display frame buffer) based on an instruction from the control CPU 141, and based on the read image data. , A video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated and output to the image display devices 16 and 18. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the VDP 200 is not only an image processor but also has an audio output function.

The VDP200 includes a control register 201, a CG bus I / F202, a CPUI / F203, a clock generation circuit 205, an extension circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, and a voice control circuit 300. And have.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and drawing control and display control are performed by writing and reading data to the control register 201. The control CPU 141 can write and read data to the control register 201 via the CPUI / F203.
The control register 201 includes a system control register that makes basic settings necessary for the VDP 200 to operate, a data transfer register that makes settings necessary for data transfer, and drawing that makes settings for drawing control. Six types of registers, a bus interface register that sets the settings required for bus access, an decompression register that sets the settings required for decompressing the compressed image, and a display register that sets the display control. It has a register.

The CG bus I / F202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 144, and image data from the CG ROM 144 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I / F 202.
Further, the CPUI / F203 is an interface circuit for communication with the control CPU 141, and the control CPU 141 outputs a display list to the VDP200, accesses a control register, and various types from the VDP200 via the CPUI / F203. The control CPU 141 inputs an interrupt signal.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices.
Specifically, data transfer between the control CPU 141 and VRAM 146, data transfer between CGROM 144 and VRAM 146, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of VRAM 146 are performed.
The clock generation circuit 205 inputs a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 145 and generates a system clock that determines the arithmetic processing speed of the VDP 200. Further, a synchronization signal generation clock is generated, and the synchronization signal is output to the image display devices 16 and 18 via the display circuit 208.

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 144, and stores the decompressed image data in the expansion storage area 146b.
The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control by a display list composed of drawing control command groups.
The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating the color data of the image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 146, and the generated video signal (the generated video signal). This is a circuit that outputs (RGB signals) to the image display devices 16 and 18. Further, the display circuit 208 also outputs synchronization signals (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing the image display devices 16 and 18 to the image display devices 16 and 18.
In the present embodiment, as the video signal, the RGB signal obtained by converting the digital signal into an analog signal is output to the image display devices 16 and 18, but the video signal may be output as the digital signal.

The memory controller 209 controls to switch between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" when the control CPU 141 gives an instruction to switch the frame buffer.
The voice control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on the command transmitted from the effect control board 130, and controls the voice output in the voice output device 9.
The voice control circuit 300 outputs music and voice using the voice data stored in the CGROM 144. In this case, the CGROM 144 includes a sound source ROM for storing audio data. The voice control circuit 300 is not included in the VDP 200 and may be provided independently in the image control unit 140.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

A panel drive device 17, a panel lighting device 23, a frame lighting device 27, a button drive motor 6c, a button vibration motor 6d, and a button light emitting LED 6e are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp control base 150.
The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the panel drive device 17, the panel lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the button drive motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, and the button light emitting LED 6e is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 161 and uses the main power supply as the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120). , Production control board 130, various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of (power failure) is provided.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. And supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described.
The gaming states that can be taken as a gaming machine are "low-probability gaming state" or "high-probability gaming state" as a state related to the jackpot lottery of special symbols, and "non-time-saving gaming" as a state related to the operation of the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a. There is a "state" or a "short-time game state". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the state related to the operation of the opening / closing member 11b (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) can be related to each other and should be independent. You can also. in short,
(1) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "short-time gaming state"
(2) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state"
(3) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "short-time gaming state"
(4) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state"
Can be provided.
In this embodiment, the gaming states (1) to (3) described above can be obtained.
The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability gaming state" and the "non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set to the present embodiment. In the above, it will be referred to as "normal gaming state".

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery of the special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. , For example, a gaming state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, in the "high probability gaming state", the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as 1 / 59.8, for example. say. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is referred to as "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the ordinary symbols corresponding to the lottery result is ". It refers to a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 11a is short and easy to be set when the player wins the game, which is set longer than the "time-saving game state". For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, and a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the first display of the normal symbol. Stop display after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is successful, the second start port 11a is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-". It refers to a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to be longer than the "time-saving game state" and when a winning is won. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of the normal symbol is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the winning lottery of the normal symbol is won. The probability is set as high as 127/128, for example. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the second starting port 11a is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advance the game advantageously without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbol. Is set to. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is advantageous. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the winning probability may be set to, for example, 0/128 in the winning lottery of the normal symbol.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13.

(Big hit judgment table of big hit lottery of special symbols)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 6 (1) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 10, and FIG. 6 (2) is the second start. The jackpot probabilities are the same in the tables of FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (2), which are the jackpot determination tables for the second special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth 11a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (2), the jackpot determination table shows the jackpot acquired when the game ball enters the stochastic gaming state, the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. The jackpot determination value for determining the determination random number value and the determination result of the jackpot lottery are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (1) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (2), and refers to the current stochastic gaming state and the acquired jackpot determination. It is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss" based on the random value.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (1), one jackpot determination random number value of "3" is determined to be "big hit" in the low probability gaming state. .. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, 10 jackpot determination random values of "3", "7" ... "128", and "250" are determined to be "big hits". If the value is a random number other than the above, it is determined to be "missing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 299, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The probability is increased by 10 times to 10/300.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, FIG. 7 (1) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol at the time of a jackpot, and FIG. 7 (2) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot. It is a special symbol determination table for loss that is referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7 (1), in the special symbol determination table for big hits, the type of the starting port when the game ball wins and the game ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. Indicates the jackpot symbol judgment value for determining the jackpot symbol determination random value acquired at the time of, the determination result (type of special symbol), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the type of special symbol. An effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information is associated with the effect symbol designation command.

As shown in FIG. 7 (2), in the special symbol determination table for loss, the type of start port when the game ball wins and the game ball enters the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. Indicates the jackpot symbol judgment value for determining the jackpot symbol determination random value acquired at the time of, the determination result (type of special symbol), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the type of special symbol. An effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information is associated with the effect symbol designation command. In addition, a plurality of lost special symbols and a special symbol determination value may be associated with each other so that a plurality of lost special symbols can be determined even in the case of loss.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting port in which the game ball has won and the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. It will be decided. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command as the information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined based on the determined type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). Here, in the effect symbol specification command, one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the fluctuation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, since the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game is completed are determined by the type of the special symbol (stop symbol data), the types of the special symbol are the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot game. It can be said that the game state after the end is determined.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot game state (special game state) when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery. In the jackpot game control table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), the opening time of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the jackpot 13a The winning opening opening / closing control table information for determining the opening / closing mode, the ending time of the jackpot state (special game state), and the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a will refer to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 and determine the opening time, the winning opening opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the special figure stop symbol data. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special game state) is determined by determining the type of the jackpot opening / closing control table, FIG. 8 shows the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special game state). Etc. are described supplementarily.

(Large winning opening opening / closing control table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table that is referred to when a big hit is won. In the big winning opening opening / closing control table, the maximum number of round games in the big hit game, the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening in one round game, the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening in each round game, and the maximum number of opening of each round game The opening time of the large winning opening for one opening is associated with the closing interval time for closing the large winning opening after the end of the round game.

The main CPU 110a specifies the type of the large winning opening opening / closing control table based on the special figure stop symbol data. Specifically, when the special figure stop symbol data is "01" or "04", the first large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No.01) is specified, and the first large winning opening opening / closing control table is specified. The first big hit game is executed with reference to, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "02" or "05", the second big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No.02) is specified, and the first When the second big hit game is executed with reference to the two big winning opening opening / closing control tables and the special figure stop symbol data is "03" or "06", the third big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No. 03) is specified, and the third big hit game is executed with reference to the third big winning opening opening / closing control table.

According to the first winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 01), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open / close the winning opening 13a a plurality of times (K = 3) per round (K = 3). The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds) 16 rounds (R) of big hit games are executed.
However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 13a before the maximum number of open times (K) is reached, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the 16 rounds of the game are completed, the first jackpot game is completed. The first jackpot game is a jackpot game with a high degree of advantage because the number of rounds is larger than that of the second and third jackpot games.

According to the second prize opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 02), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open the big winning opening 13a for up to 29.5 seconds per round, which is the fourth round (R). 2 Perform a jackpot game.
However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 13a before the opening time elapses, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the four rounds of the game are completed, the second big hit game is completed.

According to the third large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 03), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open / close the large winning opening 13 a plurality of times (K = 3) per round (K = 3). The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds). The third big hit game of 4 rounds (R) is executed.

Since the opening and closing mode of the big winning opening 13a is the same in the first big hit game and the third big hit game, the prize ball is won by the third closing time of the big winning opening 13a in the fourth round. For example, the first image display device 16 can perform a promotion effect suggesting whether or not the possible round games are increased.

Specifically, in the first jackpot game, after executing the promotion success production that makes it appear that the number of round games that can win prize balls has been successfully increased in the final phase of the promotion production, 5 of the 5 rounds of the big prize opening 13a. After the 6th round, when the prize ball can be won, the jackpot game will be advanced. On the other hand, in the third jackpot game, the jackpot game ends after executing the promotion failure effect that makes it appear that the increase in the round games that can win the prize ball has failed in the final phase of the promotion effect. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion production is raised.

(Game status setting data table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting a game state after the jackpot game is completed. In the game state setting data table, the special figure stop symbol data, the winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot lottery, the time-saving game flag indicating that the game state is in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state can be executed. The number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of special symbols, the high-probability game flag indicating that the game is in a high-probability game state, and the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the high-probability game state are shown. It is associated with the high probability number of games (X).

Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a non-time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a low-probability gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10, and based on the special figure stop symbol data and the winning state data, the time-saving game flag, the time-saving game count (J), and the high-probability game flag , The number of high-probability games (X) is determined.

When the high probability game state is set, the high probability game count (X) may be set to 50,000 times, but in the high probability game state, the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is 10/300. Therefore, since the next jackpot winning is substantially confirmed, the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game are advantageous jackpot games for the player whose next jackpot game is confirmed.

(Variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11 is a variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving gaming state, which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving gaming state. FIG. 12 is a variation pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state, which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state and the variation pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state each have a type of special symbol (first special symbol,) for displaying variation of the special symbol. (2nd special symbol), the result of the jackpot judgment (big hit lottery), the random value for reach judgment, the 1st special figure hold number (U1) or the 2nd special figure hold number (U2), and the fluctuation pattern judgment random A numerical value, a variation pattern of a special symbol, a variation time of a special symbol, and a variation pattern specification command indicating a variation pattern of a special symbol are associated with each other.

The variation pattern of the special symbol can at least specify the type of the special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, and the variation time of the special symbol. Also, if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the reach judgment random value is referred to, but in the case of a big hit, reach occurs except in special cases, so it is configured not to refer to the reach judgment random value. ing.
Although a maximum of "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special figures (U1 or U2), the fluctuation pattern is determined after subtracting "1" from the number of reserved special figures. "4" is not set as the number of holds.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, in the variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state and the variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the number of special figures reserved (U1 or U2). ) Increases, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is short is determined. As shown in FIG. 11, the variation pattern 01 (normal variation: variation) is determined in the variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving gaming state. The fluctuation pattern 02 (shortened fluctuation: fluctuation time 4 seconds) is easier to determine than the time 8 seconds).

The main CPU 110a refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table, and as a result of the jackpot determination, the determination of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data), when the game ball enters the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. Based on the acquired random value for reach judgment and random value for determining special figure fluctuation pattern, and the current number of 1st special figure hold (U1) or 2nd special figure hold (U2), the change pattern and fluctuation time of the special symbol And decide. Then, a variation pattern designation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130 based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol.

Further, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variation effect based on the variation pattern of the variation pattern designation command. In the rightmost column of the fluctuation pattern determination table, the production contents that can be executed by the fluctuation production are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "long variation", and "ultra-shortening variation" are three effect symbols that are separated or synchronized with each other. It means that it fluctuates at high speed and stops without reaching, the normal fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation, and the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation. It ends, and the ultra-shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the shortened fluctuation.

In addition, "reach" is a variation that causes the player to expect a jackpot game to be executed such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols that notify the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols fluctuate. Means an aspect. For example, when "777" is set as a combination display mode indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped at "7" in the left side region and the right side region, and the remaining effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the center region. Refers to a mode in which is fluctuating.
In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol sways slightly or is deformed slightly, making the player appear as if the effect symbol is stopped (not completely stopped). Aspect.

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach in which the effect symbol in the center area fluctuates while the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the reach with the lowest expectation of a jackpot is achieved. There is. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may make a big hit.

In addition, "SP reach" is performed after the normal reach, and is a super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach. For example, of the three effect symbols, the two temporarily stopped production symbols on the left and right are reduced and moved to the corner of the display unit of the image display device 16, and a jackpot game is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device 16. Is designed to perform a special effect that makes the player expect the player to be executed.

Further, the "SPSP reach" is performed after the normal reach or after the super reach, and is a special reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. For example, of the three effect symbols, the two left and right effect symbols that have been temporarily stopped are reduced and moved to the corners of the display unit of the image display device 16, and the "SP" is used by using almost the entire display unit of the image display device 16. It has come to perform a special production with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit than "Reach".

In addition, "full rotation reach" is a reach that is a big hit. For example, all three production symbols are aligned at the same speed and fluctuate at a low speed, and almost the entire display unit of the image display device 16 is used to perform a special production rather than "SPSP reach".

Comparing the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, it can be pointed out that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time having a relatively short fluctuation time is more easily determined in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to change the fluctuation time of the special symbol between the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a table relating to a normal symbol and an opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a.
FIG. 13 (1) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for ordinary symbols. FIG. 13 (2) is a stop symbol determination table of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the winning lottery result of the ordinary symbol. FIG. 13 (3) is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table of a normal symbol. FIG. 13 (4) is a diagram showing an opening mode determination table of the second starting port.

(Hit judgment table for ordinary symbols)
As shown in FIG. 13 (1), in the hit determination table, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the hit determination random value acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the determination result of the win lottery are displayed. It is associated.
The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table and determines whether it is "hit" or "miss" based on the current time-saving game state and the acquired random value for hit determination.

According to the hit determination table, one hit determination random value of "19" is determined to be a hit in the non-time saving game state, and 20 pieces of "0" to "18" are determined in the time saving game state. The random value for hit determination is determined to be a hit. Therefore, the rate of winning is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Normal symbol determination table)
As shown in FIG. 13 (2), in the stop symbol determination table, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the winning symbol determination random value acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the type of the normal symbol ( The stop symbol data) is associated with a normal symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the normal symbol.
The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table, and causes the normal symbol first display 19c to stop and display the normal symbol based on the current game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for the winning symbol. And the normal figure stop symbol data is decided. Then, at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol designation command as information indicating the type of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) and transmitted to the effect control board 130. ..

(Fluctuating pattern determination table for ordinary symbols)
As shown in FIG. 13 (3), the fluctuation pattern determination table shows the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination (win lottery), and the fluctuation of the normal map acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12. The pattern determination random value, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are associated with each other.
The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table, and determines the variation time of the normal symbol based on the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the result of the winning lottery, and the random value for determining the variation pattern of the normal figure. Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined fluctuation time and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Opening mode determination table for the second starting port)
As shown in FIG. 13 (4), in the opening mode determination table of the second starting port, a normal symbol (stop symbol data), a maximum number of times (S) of opening the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b), and Corresponds to the first opening time and closing time of the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time. It is attached.
The main CPU 110a refers to the opening mode determination table, and based on the stop symbol data, the maximum number of times the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b) is opened, the first opening time and closing time, and the second opening time and closing. Determine the time.

In the opening mode determination table, the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2) is more advantageous to the player than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). The opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is more advantageous to the player than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). There is.
Since the most advantageous normal symbol stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is determined when a hit occurs in the time-saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving game state in the time-saving game state. The second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b) is operated so as to be.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110.
This main process is started when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and is continuously executed while the main control board 110 is running.

First, in step S1, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts, in step S2, initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers are performed, and in step S3, startup waiting processing of another board is performed. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 to start up so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

In step S4, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RAM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S5, the firing permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching device 26 to launch the game ball.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored in the game RAM area of the main RAM 110c is "ON". If the backup flag is "ON" (step S6; Yes), the process is transferred to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not "ON" (step S6; No), the first time. The process is moved to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RAM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d and the RAM clear switch 58c are "ON". If there is a setting change operation (step S8; Yes), the process is transferred to step S9 to shift to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation (step S8; No), the process proceeds to step S10. Move the process.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a performs a setting change process. Specifically, the current set value saved in the set value area of the game RAM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the performance display 111, and the setting change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Furthermore, every time the RAM clear switch 58c is operated, the set value is set to "1" to
When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes (updates) within the range of "4", displays the updated setting value on the 7-segment LED, and changes the setting key switch 58d from "ON" to "OFF", the setting value is changed. The set value after the change (update) is saved in the set value area as the one to be confirmed, the display of the set value on the performance display 111 is ended, and the process for ending the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 16 and 18 are displayed on the setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are predetermined while the setting is being changed. It is fully lit with the emission color (for example, white) of. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RAM area and the checksum calculated in step S7 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RAM area is normal), the process is moved to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RAM area is normal), the process is started. Assuming that the control state before the power is turned off cannot be restored normally, the process is moved to step S34.

When the backup flag is not "ON", that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (step S11; Yes), the process is transferred to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process is started. (Step S11; No), the process is transferred to step S12.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing. Specifically, error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on an error display (not shown) provided on the power supply board 160 to indicate that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. After sending the unrecoverable error specification command, set interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, and after clearing the output port, return from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 to indicate the occurrence of an unrecoverable error. Outputs an impossible error signal (security signal) and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control) because there is an abnormality in the data of the game RAM area from the checksum result, and the setting is changed. It is not released unless the process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned "OFF" and then the power switch is turned "ON" without the setting change operation, the power switch is released. There is no such thing, and the power switch must be turned "ON" with the setting change operation.

The "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, but it may be canceled even when the RAM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Change settings" is displayed on the image display devices 16 and 18. Please do "), turn on the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. It is to output an unrecoverable error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been cut off.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a RAM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 58c is "ON". If the RAM clear switch 58c is "ON" (step S12; Yes), the process is transferred to step S13 to execute the RAM clear, and if the RAM clear switch 58c is not "ON" (step S12; Yes). No), the process is transferred to step S16.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a performs a RAM clear process. Specifically, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the game RAM area) is performed.
In step S14, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized (RAM cleared) to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. Next, in step S15, a game state designation command indicating the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state) is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process is transferred to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The “power-on notification” is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are predetermined for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). The power-on notification sound ("RAM cleared" sound + buzzer sound) indicating that the RAM area has been initialized from the voice output device 9 is played for a predetermined period. It is to output over (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the image display devices 16 and 18 may display an initialized image (character image of "RAM clear") notifying that the RAM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58da is "ON". If the setting key switch 58d is "ON" (step S16; Yes), the process shifts to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if the setting key switch 58d is not "ON" (step S16). ; No), the process is moved to step S18 in order to return the control state of the game to the state before the power is turned off.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process. Specifically, the current set value stored and held in the set value area of the game RAM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the performance display 111, and the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. ..

Further, when there is a confirmation end operation in which the setting key switch 58d is changed from "ON" to "OFF", the display of the set value on the performance display 111 is ended, and a process for ending the setting confirmation mode is performed.

The effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command will perform a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed. Specifically, the image display devices 16 and 18 display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed, and a predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are being confirmed. All lights are turned on in color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“confirming the set value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and checksum set in the game RAM area, and sets the game RAM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power was turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure (power failure) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for terminating the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the notification during power restoration.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game returns to the state before the power failure occurred, and the image display devices 16 and 18 are informed that the power restoration is in progress ("power restoration in progress"). The frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or from the sound output device 9. It is to output a power restoration notification sound (“power is restored” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S20, the main CPU 110a indicates other commands (a first special symbol hold number (U1), a special symbol storage designation command indicating a second special symbol hold number (U2), and a normal symbol hold number (G). (Ordinary symbol memory designation command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure hold and the number of normal figure hold, and the process for displaying the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 16 can be performed. It will be done.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S23, permits full interrupt.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step S25, the jackpot determination Initial value random value update processing is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, in step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input (step S26; No), step S24. If a power failure detection signal is input (step S26; Yes), the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S28, and in step S29, sets the game RAM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c. The checksum (abnormality determination data) of (excluding) is calculated and saved in the game RAM area, and in step S30, the backup flag is turned “ON” in the game RAM area of the main RAM 110c, and step S31. In, the process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the main control board 110.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 ms), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

First, in step S101, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area. Next, in step S102, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, updates the normal symbol time counter, and the normal electric opening time counter. Performs time control processing for updating various timer counters such as update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of subtracting "1" from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal power opening time counter.

In step S103, the main CPU 110a uses the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value, the hit determination random number value, the normal symbol determination random number value, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number. Performs random number update processing of numerical values. Specifically, "1" is added to each random number counter to update the random number counter. If the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0", and if the random number counter makes one round, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value random number at that time.

In step S104, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process for updating the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S105, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process. In this process, whether or not the main CPU 110a has input to each of the first start port detection switch 10a, the second start port detection switch 11c, the gate detection switch 12a, the large winning opening detection switch 13c, and the general winning opening detection switch 14a. Performs input control processing to determine. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S106, the main CPU 110a has acquired special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. Judgment of random value for judgment, random value for judgment of fluctuation pattern), fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing of the big winning opening 13a, setting of the game state, etc. conduct. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S107, the main CPU 110a determines the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 12, displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, opens and closes the second starting port 11a (auxiliary game), and the like. Performs Fuden control processing.

In step S108, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 110a refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120. conduct. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 100.

In step S109, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process. In this process, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or a radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 58a and the radio wave detection sensor 58b, and if detected, a magnetic abnormality error detection command or a radio wave abnormality error detection. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the door open state based on the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a, and if detected, transmits a door open error detection command to the effect control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the clogging of the game ball in the passage where the game ball is discharged from the storage portion of the game ball based on the detection signal from the saucer full detection switch 32a, and if detected, the dish full error detection command. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when it is detected that the error state is canceled by the state of the input signal and the detection signal, the main CPU 110a transmits an error release command to the effect control board 130. Further, the effect control board 130 transmits a signal for notifying the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 of error detection and error cancellation.
The main CPU 110a does not transmit an error release signal depending on the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. That is, the error release signal is transmitted when the dish is full, the door is open, and the ball is clogged, but the error release signal is not transmitted when the illegal radio wave is detected.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a has external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, drive control data output to the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, and the first special symbol. 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st Data creation processing such as 1 display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, setting display 19k, etc. I do.

In step S111, the main CPU 110a performs a port output process for outputting signals such as external output data and drive control data created in step S110. In addition, display output processing for outputting signals such as display control data created in step S110 is performed. Further, a command output process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is performed.

In step S112, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Input control processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S121, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 14a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 14. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a adds predetermined data to the general winning opening counter used for the winning ball and updates it.

In step S122, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch 13c is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 13a. When the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 13c, the main CPU 110a adds and updates predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball, and wins the large winning opening 13a. Large winning opening ball entry counter (C) for counting the game balls that have been played The counter in the storage area is added and updated.

In step S123, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 10.

In step S124, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 11b.
When the main CPU 110a inputs the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c, the main CPU 110a performs the same process as in step S123.
However, in this second start port detection switch input process, "1" is added to the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and the extracted jackpot determination random value, special symbol determination random value, and reach determination are performed. The random value for use is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process differ only in the storage area for storing various data, and all other processes are the same.

In step S125, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 12.
In step S126, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 58e has been input, and 1 is subtracted from the winning ball counter (D) to update (D ← D-1). It is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter (D) is within the range of the predetermined judgment value (lower limit value <D <upper limit value), and if it is outside the range of the judgment value, an abnormal winning occurs. The error specification command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission data storage area for production. If it is within the range of the judgment value, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated.
As a result, the error designation command for abnormal winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning notifies the abnormal winning error and indicates that the abnormal winning error has occurred. Notify.

(1st start port detection switch input process)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a first start port detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S131, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is input (step S131; Yes), the process shifts to step S132, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is not input (step S131; Yes). S131; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S132, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the start port prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

Next, in step S133, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4. When the number of holdings set in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (step S133; Yes), the process is transferred to step S134 and the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is stored. If the set number of reserved items is not less than 4 (step S133; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S134, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.
In step S135, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. The random value for jackpot judgment is stored.
In step S136, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a special symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and sets the vacant storage unit into the vacant storage unit. The acquired random number value for the special symbol is stored.

In step S137, the main CPU 110a acquires the game random value (reach determination random value and fluctuation pattern determination random value), and is a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area. Is searched, and the acquired random number values for games (random value for reach determination and random value for fluctuation pattern determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.
In step S138, the main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process. The first start for showing the determination information of the first start port in advance based on each random value acquired in steps S135 to S137 with reference to the advance determination table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state. Determine the winning information.

In step S139, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command based on the first start winning information determined in the first pre-determination process of step S138 in the production transmission data storage area.

As a result, the first start opening prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start port prize designation command is first started. The mouth prize designation command is analyzed, and a predetermined advance notice effect is produced from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start mouth prize designation command to one or more variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice for executing the command or a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon.

However, the first pre-determination process is determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the first starting port 10. Therefore, if the game state is changed before the first hold reserved by the ball is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the first pre-determination process. ..

In step S140, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area, and the first special corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) updated in step S134. Set the symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S141, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol hold display data for displaying the first hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the first special symbol hold first display 19d in a predetermined processing area. Then, the input process of the first start port detection switch this time is completed. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the first special symbol is output. The first hold number is displayed on the symbol first display 19d.

(2nd start port detection switch input process)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a second start port detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S151, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input (step S151; Yes), the process is transferred to step S152, and when the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is not input (step S151; Yes). S151; No), the second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S152, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the start port prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

Next, in step S153, the main CPU 110a updates (D ← D + 1) by adding “1” to the ball entry counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 11a.
In step S154, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is in progress. If the auxiliary game is in progress (step S154; Yes), the process is transferred to step S159, and if the auxiliary game is not in progress (step S154; No), the process is transferred to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the illegal entry counter (E) for monitoring the illegal entry into the second starting port 11a and updates (E ← E + 1).
In step S156, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal entry counter is larger than the specified number (10). If the number is greater than the specified number (step S156; Yes), the process is transferred to step S157, and if the number is less than the specified number (step S156; No), the process is transferred to step S160.

In step S157, the main CPU 110a sets an illegal entry error designation command in the production transmission data storage area assuming that an illegal entry has occurred. As a result, the illegal entry error designation command is transmitted to the effect entry control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the illegal entry error designation command issues an illegal entry error notification and an illegal entry error occurs. Notify that you have done so.

In step S158, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal entry counter (E) to "0".
In step S159, the main CPU 110a updates the update (L ← L + 1) by adding “1” to the second start port entry counter (L).

Next, in step S160, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of holdings set in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area is less than 4. When the number of holdings set in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area is less than 4 (step S160; Yes), the process is transferred to step S154 and the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area is stored. If the set number of reserved items is not less than 4 (step S160; No), the second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S161, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.
In step S162, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. The random value for jackpot judgment is stored.
In step S163, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a special symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and sets the vacant storage unit into the vacant storage unit. The acquired random number value for the special symbol is stored.

In step S164, the main CPU 110a acquires the game random value (reach determination random value and fluctuation pattern determination random value), and is a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area. Is searched, and the acquired random number values for games (random value for reach determination and random value for fluctuation pattern determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.
In step S165, the main CPU 110a performs the second pre-determination process. The second start for showing the determination information of the second start port in advance based on each random number value acquired in the above steps S162 to S164 with reference to the advance determination table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state. Determine the winning information.

In step S166, the main CPU 110a sets the second start opening winning designation command based on the second start winning information determined in the second pre-determination process of step S165 in the production transmission data storage area.

As a result, the first start opening prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start port prize designation command receives the second start. The mouth prize designation command is analyzed, and a predetermined advance notice effect is produced from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second start mouth prize designation command to one or more variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice for executing the command or a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon.

However, the second pre-determination process is determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the second start opening 11a. Therefore, if the game state is changed before the second hold reserved by the ball is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the second pre-determination process. ..

In step S167, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and the second special corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) updated in step S161. Set the symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S168, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol hold display data for displaying the second hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the second special symbol hold first display 19e in a predetermined processing area. Then, the input process of the second start port detection switch this time is completed. As a result, when the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the second special symbol is output. The second hold number is displayed on the symbol first display 19e.

(Gate detection switch input processing)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a gate detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input.

When it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input (step S171; Yes), the main CPU 110a determines in step S172 whether or not the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4.
If the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is not input (step S171; No), the main CPU 110a ends the gate detection switch input process.
In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, and the upper limit number of holdings of the right of the variation display of the normal symbol is set to "4".

If it is determined in step S172 that the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 (step S172; Yes), in step S173, the main CPU 110a is stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area. The value obtained by adding "1" to the normal symbol hold number (G) is stored as a new normal symbol hold number (G). If it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is not less than 4 (step S172; No), the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S174, the main CPU 110a acquires a hit determination random value, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol hold storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for collision detection.

In step S175, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for symbol determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for symbol determination.

In step S176, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and searches for a vacant storage unit. The random value for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map acquired in is stored in.
As described above, the hit determination random value, the symbol determination random value, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination random value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area.

In step S177, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area, and issues a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) updated in step S173. Set in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S178, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol hold display data for displaying the normal symbol hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the normal symbol hold first display 19f in a predetermined processing area, and this time. The gate detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the normal symbol first. The number of reserved figures is displayed on the vessel 19f.

(Special figure special electric control processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating the special figure special electric control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S181, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data, and refers to the branch address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S182.

In step S183, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0 (step S183; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the special symbol storage determination process (step S184).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 0 in step S183 (step S183; No), in step S185, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 1.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S185 (step S185; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S186).

In step S185, when the special figure special electric processing data = 1 (step S185; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187.
In step S187, if the special figure special electric processing data = 2 (step S187; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the special symbol stop process (step S188).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187 (step S187; No), in step S189, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 3.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game processing (step S190).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; No), in step S191, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 4.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 in step S191 (step S191; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing (step S192).
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is not set in step S191 (step S191; No), the main CPU 110a ends the special figure special electric control process.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol memory determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S201, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Here, if the variation of the special symbol is being displayed, that is, if the special symbol time counter ≠ 0 (step S201; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process ends.
Further, if the variation display of the special symbol is not in progress, that is, if the special symbol time count = 0 (step S201; No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S202 and stores the second special symbol hold number (U2). It is determined whether the area is "1" or more.

If it is determined in step S202 that the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area is not "1" or more (step S202; No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S204 and sets the process to the second special symbol hold number. (U2) If it is determined that the storage area is "1" or more, the process is moved to step S203. As a result, the second special symbol storage area is processed with priority over the first special symbol storage area.

In step S203, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area and stores it.
In step S204, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. When it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (step S204; No), the process is transferred to step S215, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is ". If it is determined that the value is 1 ”or higher (step S204; Yes), the process proceeds to step S205.
In step S205, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.

In step S206, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold number (U) storage area subtracted in steps S202 to S205. Specifically, the data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit.

Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is stored in the special symbol hold storage. It will be erased from the area.

In step S207, the main CPU 110a is based on the data (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206. Execute the jackpot judgment process.

In step S208, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol data determined in step S207 in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S209, the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process.
In the variation pattern determination process, first, the variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is determined with reference to the game RAM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, in the case of the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 11 is determined, and in the case of the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Determine the pattern determination table. After that, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern determination table with reference to the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the variation pattern determination random value.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the production transmission data storage area.
In step S211 the game state at the start of the fluctuation is confirmed, and the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is set in the production transmission data storage area.
In step S212, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b. That is, the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the first special symbol first. The variable display of the device 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b is started.

First, in step S213, when the main CPU 110a starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above, the special symbol time counter is provided with the fluctuation time (counter value) based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S208. Set to the counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S214, the main CPU 110a sets 00H to the customer waiting state determination flag. That is, the customer waiting state determination flag is cleared. The customer waiting state determination flag = "00H" indicates that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner or a jackpot game is being played. On the other hand, when neither the variable display of the special symbol nor the jackpot game is in progress (non-game state), the customer waiting state determination flag = "01H" is stored. When the customer waiting state determination flag = "01H" is stored, the customer waiting state specification command is set in step S217 described later, and it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or the jackpot game is not performed. Will be done.

In step S215, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.
In step S204, when it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "0", that is, both the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) are reserved. If not, the main CPU 110a determines in step S215 whether or not 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag.

When 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; Yes), the special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and when 01H is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; Yes). No), the process is transferred to step S217.
In step S217, the main CPU 110a sets 01H to the customer waiting state determination flag so that the customer waiting state designation command is not set many times in step S218 described later.
In step S218, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

(Big hit judgment process)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S221, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 10. When the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first start port (step S221; Yes), it shifts the process to step S222, and when it determines that it is not the first start port (step S221; No), it shifts the process to step 223. ..

In step S222, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S223, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

In step S224, the main CPU 110a refers to the current stochastic gaming state and the jackpot determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, and the selected jackpot determination table, and “big hit”. It is determined whether it is "missing" or "missing".

In step S225, if the main CPU 110a determines "big hit" (step S225; Yes), the process shifts to step S226, and if it determines "missing" (step S225; No), the process proceeds to step S227. Move the process.

In step S226, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for big hits. On the other hand, in step S227, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for loss.

In step S228, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the start port for which the jackpot determination is performed, the special symbol, the jackpot symbol determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the storage area, and the selected table. By collating, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) is determined.

The determined special symbol is used to determine the operating mode of the jackpot 13a in the jackpot game processing described later, and is also used to determine the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

In step S229, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S228 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
In step S241, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S212 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). When it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S241; No), the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol fluctuation processing. On the other hand, when the main CPU 110a determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 110a stops the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S228 at the first special symbol first display 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b. Display. Specifically, the special symbol stop display data is set in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 19a or the second special symbol 1st display 19b, and the player is notified of the result of the jackpot lottery. Will be done.

In step S243, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S244, when the main CPU 110a starts the stop display of the special symbol as described above, the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 250 counter) is set in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted by "1" every 2 ms in step S110.
In step S245, the main CPU 110a sets "2" in the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S251, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S244 has elapsed (whether the special symbol time counter ≠ 0). As a result, when it is determined that the symbol stop time has elapsed (step S251; Yes), the process is transferred to step S252, and when it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S251; No). ), Ends the special symbol stop processing.

In step S252, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the time saving game flag storage area. The case where the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the time-saving game flag storage area is the case where the current game state is the time-saving game state.
When the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the time-saving game flag storage area (step S252; Yes), the process is transferred to step S253, and when the time-saving game flag is "OFF" in the time-saving game flag storage area. (Step S252; No), the process is transferred to step S258.

In step S253, the main CPU 110a updates by subtracting "1" from the number of time-saving games (J) stored in the time-saving game number (J) storage area, and in step S254, the new number of time-saving games (J) Is determined to be "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the number of time-saving games (J) is "0" (step S254; Yes), the process shifts to step 255, and determines that the number of time-saving games (J) is not "0". In the case (step S254; No), the process is transferred to step S258.

In step S255, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game flag set in the time-saving game flag storage area to "OFF". As a result, the time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state.

In step S256, the main CPU 110a sets the time saving game state erasing data for erasing the display (LED lighting) of the time saving game state display 19h (LED turning off) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time-saving game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the time-saving game state indicator is displayed. The display of 19h will be erased.

In step S257, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed erase data for erasing the display (LED on) of the right-handed first display 19j (LED off) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the right-handed erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. The display of 19j will be erased.

In step S258, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area. The case where the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area is the case where the current game state is the high-probability game state.
When the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (step S258; Yes), the process is transferred to step S259, and the high-probability game flag is "OFF" in the high-probability game flag storage area. If so (step S258; No), the process is transferred to step S263.

In step S259, the main CPU 110a updates by subtracting "1" from the high-probability game count (X) stored in the high-probability game count (X) storage area, and in step S260, a new high-probability game count. It is determined whether or not (X) is "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the high-probability game count (X) is "0" (step S260; Yes), the process shifts to step 261 and the high-probability game count (X) must be "0". If it is determined (step S260; No), the process is transferred to step S263.

In step S261, the main CPU 110a turns the high-probability game flag installed in the high-probability game flag storage area "OFF". As a result, the high-probability gaming state ends and the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state.

In step S262, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability game state erasing data for erasing the display (LED on) of the high-probability game state indicator 19g (LED off) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the high-probability game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability game state is output. The display of the display 19g will be erased.

In step S263, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state and sets the game state designation command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S264, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot symbol (stop symbol data = 01 to 06). When it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (step S264; No), in step S265, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric processing data, ends the special symbol stop processing this time, and uses the jackpot symbol. If it is determined that there is (step S264; Yes), the process is transferred to step S266.

In step S266, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the time saving game flag storage area. The main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S267 when the time saving game flag is "ON" (step S266; Yes), and when the time saving game flag is "OFF" (step S266; No). , Step S268.

In step S267, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game state erasing data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time-saving game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the time-saving game state indicator is displayed. The display of 19h will be erased (the LED will be turned off).

In step S268, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the high probability game flag storage area. The main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S269 when the high-probability game flag is "ON" (step S268; Yes), and when the high-probability game flag is "OFF" (step S268; Yes). No), the process is transferred to step S270.

In step S269, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability game state erasure data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the high-probability game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability game state is output. The display of the display 19g will be erased (the LED will be turned off).

In step S270, the main CPU 110a sets "3" in the special figure special electric processing data.
In step S271, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game number (X) storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, and the time-saving game number (J) storage area are cleared.

In step S272, the main CPU 110a sets the large winning opening open / close control table. Specifically, the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 is referred to, and the jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set.

In step S273, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S274, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (first big hit to third big hit) based on the big winning opening opening / closing control table set in step S272, and opens according to the type of big hit game. Set the specified command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the opening designation command of the jackpot game is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S275, the main CPU 110a sets the round number display data for displaying the round number of the jackpot game (LED lighting) on the round number display 19i in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the round number display 19i is displayed. The number of rounds will be displayed.

In step S276, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed display data for causing the right-handed first display 19j to display the right-handed display (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and stops the special symbol this time. End the process. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. Right-handed display will be performed at 19j.

(Big hit game processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot game process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S281, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. For example, if "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area, it means that the opening is currently in progress. Therefore, the round game count (R) storage area is referred to to determine whether the opening is currently in progress.
When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening is currently in progress (step S281; Yes), the process shifts to step S282, and when it is determined that the main CPU 110a is not currently opening (step S281; No), the process proceeds to step S286. To move.

In step S282, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter set in step S273 has become "0", and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed (step S282; No), the jackpot game process of this time is ended, and if the opening time has elapsed (step S282; Yes), the process is moved to step S283.

In step S283, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since the round game has not been performed even once, "1" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

In step S284, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the large winning opening 13a has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the opening number (K) storage area. Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening / closing control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S285, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, the round designation command for the first open round is set.

In step S286, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening 13a is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. If it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is open (step S286; Yes), the process is transferred to step S287, and if it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is not open (step S286; No), The process is transferred to step S289.

In step S287, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 13a is satisfied.
This "opening end condition" is that the value of the large winning opening ball entry counter (C) has reached the maximum number (for example, 9) or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). That) is applicable.
When the main CPU 110a determines that the "opening end condition" is satisfied (step S287; Yes), the process shifts to step S288, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied (step S287; Yes). S287; No), the current jackpot game process is completed.

In step S288, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process (interval process). Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the large winning opening 13a is closed. Further, referring to the large winning opening opening / closing control table set in step S272 above, the closing time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to the counter. Further, a command for designating the closing of the winning opening, which indicates that the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the open state to the closed state, is set in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the command for designating the closing of the winning opening is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S289, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening 13a is currently closed (during the interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. If it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is closed (step S289; Yes), the process is transferred to step S290, and if it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is not closed (step S289; No), The process is transferred to step S290.

In step S290, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening 13a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has become "0". When the closing time is finished (step S290; Yes), the process is transferred to step S291, and when the closing time is not finished (step S290; No), the current jackpot game process is finished.

In step S291, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not this round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening entry counter (C) has reached the specified number (9 pieces) or the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If it is determined that the current round is completed (step S291; Yes), the process is transferred to step S293, and if it is determined that the current round is not completed (step S291; No), the process is performed in step S292. Transfer.

In step S292, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Number of releases (K) The number of releases (K) stored in the storage area is updated by adding "1" (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening / closing control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S293, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the current jackpot game. If it is determined that the final round is over (step S293; Yes), the process is transferred to step S297, and if it is determined that the final round is not over (step S293; No), the process is transferred to step S294. ..

In step S294, the main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process. Specifically, "0" is set in the opening count (K) storage area and the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game count (R) round game count (R) stored in the storage area. Is added by "1" and updated (R ← R + 1).

In step 295, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening / closing control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S296, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S297, the main CPU 110 performs an ending transition process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open number (K) storage area, the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game number (R) storage area to clear the value of each storage area. In addition, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data.

In step S298, the main CPU 110a sets the ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S299, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. If the ending is in progress (step S299; Yes), the process is moved to step S300, and if the ending is not in progress (step S299; No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (step S300; Yes), the process is transferred to step S301, and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S300; No), the current jackpot game process To finish.
In step S301, the main CPU 110a sets "4" in the special figure special electric processing data and ends the jackpot game.

(Special game end processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a special game (big hit game) end process by the main control board 110.
In step S321, the main CPU 110a loads the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area and the game information in the game state buffer.

In step S322, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process. Specifically, the high-probability game flag is stored at the end of the jackpot game based on the special figure stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer with reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. Process whether to set the high probability game flag in the area. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is any one of "01", "02", "04", and "05", the high-probability game flag is set (turned on) in the high-probability game flag storage area.

In step S323, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process. Specifically, the high-probability game count (X) storage area is based on the special figure stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer with reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. To set a predetermined number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the high probability game count (X) storage area.

In step S324, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer with reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. Performs processing as to whether or not to make it. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", a flag is set (turned on) in the time saving game flag storage area.

In step S325, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game number setting process. With reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10, a predetermined number of times is set in the time saving game number (J) storage area based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the time saving game number (J) storage area.

In step S326, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state with reference to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S327, the main CPU 110a sets the round number erasing data for erasing the display (LED lighting) of the round number indicator 19i (LED turning off) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the round number indicator 19i The display will be erased.

In step S328, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the special game end processing this time.

(Fuzu Fuden control processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a general-purpose electric power control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S331, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general-purpose electric processing data, and in step S332, calculates the branch address from the loaded general-purpose electric processing data.

In step S333, if the normal symbol processing data = 0 (step S333; Yes), the main CPU 110a performs the normal symbol variation processing in step S334, and ends the current normal symbol control processing. If the normal map normal power processing data is not 0 (step S333; No), it is determined that the normal figure normal power processing data = 1, the auxiliary game process is performed in step S335, and the normal figure normal power control process is terminated.

(Normal symbol variation processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S341, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress (normal symbol time counter ≠ 0) (step S341; Yes), the process is transferred to step S358, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S341; No). Moves the process to step S342.

In step S342, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area that stores the normal symbol hold number is 1 or more. If it is determined that the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is 1 or more (S342; Yes), the process is moved to step S343, and the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is not 1 or more. If it is determined (S342; No), the normal symbol variation processing this time is terminated.

In step S343, the main CPU 110a is updated (G ← G + 1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area.
In step S344, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area subtracted in step S343. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is normally stored in the symbol hold. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the hit determination random value, the hit symbol determination random value, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted.

In step S345, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process. Specifically, the current time-saving game state and the hit determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area are collated with the hit determination table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 13 (a). Judgment as to whether or not it is a hit (a lottery for winning a normal symbol) is performed.

In step S346, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, it is shown whether or not the current state of the game is shortened, the result of the hit determination in step S345, and the random value for stopping the normal figure stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. The type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the stop symbol determination table of the normal symbol shown in 13 (b), and is set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

In step S347, the main CPU 110a sets the normal figure designation command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol data determined in step S346 in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the general map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S348, the main CPU 110a performs a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the figure shows whether or not the game is currently in a short-time game state, the result of the hit determination in step S345, and the normal symbol variation pattern random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined by collating with the fluctuation pattern determination table of the normal symbol shown in 13 (c).

In step S349, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the normal symbol determined in step S348 in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol determined in step S349 in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S351, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to display the variation of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the normal symbol first. The variable display of the vessel 19c is started.

In step S352, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S353, the main CPU 110a sets the above-mentioned normal symbol hold display data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current normal symbol variation processing. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111. The number of reserved figures is displayed on the display 19f.

In step S354, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S350 is "0". When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S354; Yes), the process is transferred to step S355, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has not elapsed (S354; No). Ends the normal symbol change processing this time.

In step S355, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol stop display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to stop and display the normal symbol determined in step S346 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the normal symbol first. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the vessel 19c, and the player is notified of the lottery determination result.

In step S356, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol confirmation command indicating the stop display of the normal symbol in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S357, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol. If it is a hit stop symbol (S357; Yes), the process is transferred to step S358, and if it is not a hit stop symbol (S357; No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S358, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the normal-figure general-purpose processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 29.

In step S359, the main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 110a first sets the opening mode determination table of the second starting port of the main RAM 110c, and sets "1" in the opening number (S) stored in the opening number (S) storage area. Add and update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second starting port 11a has not been opened even once, "1" is stored in the opening number (S) storage area. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 11a is opened. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S), and the normal symbol variation processing of this time is performed. To finish. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

(Auxiliary game processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an auxiliary game process on the main control board 110.

In step S361, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 11a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is set. When it is determined that the second starting port 11a is open (step S361; Yes), the process is transferred to step S362, and when it is determined that the second starting port 11a is not open (S361; No). The process is transferred to step S367.

In step S362, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition of the second starting port 11a is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second start port entry counter (L) has reached the specified number (10), or the opening time in the current number of opening times (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0). ) Applies. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S362; Yes), the process is transferred to step S363, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S362; No). , End this auxiliary game processing.

In step S363, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port closing process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second starting port 11a is closed. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359, the closing time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). .. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S364, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) is the number of times the second start port 11a is opened in advance, or the value of the second start port entry counter (L) is a specified number (10). (Individual) has been reached. Then, when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied (step S364; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S365, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied (step S364; Yes). In S365; No), the auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S365, the main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game end process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (S) storage area and the second start port entry counter (L) storage area of the second start port 11a to clear the value of each storage area.

In step S366, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the normal symbol processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S367, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second starting port 11a has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is not at "0". When it is determined that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has ended (step S367; Yes), the process is transferred to step S368, and when it is determined that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has not ended (step S367; Yes). In S367; No), the auxiliary game processing this time is completed.

In step S368, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port opening process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d in order to open the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 11a is opened. Further, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S) with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359.

(Data creation process)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a data creation process on the main control board 110.
In step S371, the main CPU 110a drives the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d to open or closed based on the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid energizing stop data set in the big hit game process. Create drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for.

In step S372, the main CPU 110a opens or closes the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d based on the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the auxiliary game process. Create drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving the solenoid.

In step S373, the main CPU 110a is the first special symbol first display 19a or the second special based on the special symbol variation display data or the special symbol stop display data set in the special symbol memory determination process or the special symbol variation process. The display control data for the special symbol 1st display corresponding to the special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED of the symbol 1st display 19b is created.

In step S374, the main CPU 110a normally turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol first display 19c based on the normal symbol variation display data or the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol variation process. The display control data for the normal symbol first display corresponding to the symbol display signal is created.

In step S375, the main CPU 110a is set with special symbol hold display data (first special symbol hold display data, first special symbol hold display data, first) set in the first start port detection switch input process, the second start port detection switch input process, or the special symbol storage determination process. 2 Supports a special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED of the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d or the 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e based on the special symbol hold display data). Special symbol hold Create display control data for the first display.

In step S376, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol hold first display 19f based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the gate detection switch input process or the normal symbol variation process. The display control data for the normal symbol hold 1st display corresponding to the normal symbol hold display signal is created.

In step S377, the main CPU 110a turns on or off the LED of the round number indicator 19i based on the round number display data or the round number erasure data set in the special symbol stop process or the special game end process. Create display control data for the number of rounds indicator corresponding to the display signal.

In step S378, the main CPU 110a becomes a right-handed display signal for turning on or off the LED of the right-handed first display 19j based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erase data set in the special symbol stop processing. Create the corresponding display control data for the right-handed first display.

In step S379, if the gaming state at the time of power restoration is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the high-probability gaming state indicator for lighting the LED of the high-probability gaming state indicator 19g.

In step S380, if the game state at the time of power restoration is the time-saving game state, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the time-saving game state display for lighting the LED of the time-saving game state display 19h.

In step S381, the main CPU 110a creates control data for the setting display for lighting the setting display 19k based on whether or not the gaming machine has a setting in which the winning probability of the jackpot lottery fluctuates.

In step S382, the main CPU 110a generates an external signal output data for outputting external information data (game information), information related to an abnormality, RAM clear execution information (security signal), and the like to the outside of the game machine. Perform data creation process.

(Output control processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an output control process on the main control board 110.
In step S391, the main CPU 110a performs a port output process for outputting various drive control data created in steps S371 to S372 in order to drive the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13b and the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 11d. Further, external signal output data such as external information data (game information) created in step S382, information related to an abnormality, and RAM clear execution information (security signal) is output to the game information output terminal board 90.

In step 392, the main CPU 110 includes a first special symbol first display 19a, a second special symbol first display 19b, a normal symbol first display 19c, a first special symbol hold first indicator 19d, and a second special. Symbol hold 1st indicator 19e, normal symbol hold 1st indicator 19f, high probability game status indicator 19g, time saving game status indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed 1st indicator 19j, setting indicator 19k In order to turn on, turn off, or blink each LED of the above, the display output process for outputting various display control data created in the above steps S373 to S382 is performed.

In step S393, the main CPU 110a transmits the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and directs and controls the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Performs command output processing to be transmitted to the board 130.

(Explanation of command)
32 and 33 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.
The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot and the probabilistic game state, the effect symbol designation command can be said to indicate the type of the jackpot and the game state.

In this effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol determined when the variable display of the special symbol is started is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the effect symbol designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

In this first special symbol storage designation command, when the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol storage number (U1) storage area is switched, the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols is directed and controlled. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in step S140 or step S206, the first special symbol storage corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is performed. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the first special symbol storage designation command, for example, the first special symbol storage 1 designation command and the first special indicating that the number of reservations stored in the first special symbol storage number (U1) storage area is "1". The number of reserved symbols (U1) There is a first special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reserved symbols stored in the storage area is "2".

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

In this second special symbol storage designation command, when the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is switched, the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols is directed and controlled. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area increases or decreases in step S160 or step S206, the second special symbol storage corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is performed. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the second special symbol storage designation command, for example, the second special symbol storage 1 designation command and the second special indicating that the number of reservations stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is "1". The number of reserved symbols (U2) There is a second special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reserved symbols stored in the storage area is "2".
In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol memory designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E2H", and the type of special symbol (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol). ), And if it is the first special symbol, "DATA" is set to "01H", and if it is the second special symbol, "DATA" is set to "02H". That is, as the special symbol confirmation command, there are a first special symbol confirmation command and a second special symbol confirmation command.

This special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 19a or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b in step S243, the special symbol confirmation command is the transmission data for the effect of the main RAM 110c. Set in the storage area. Immediately after that, the special symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E2H" and "DATA" is set to "03H".
This normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 19c in step S356, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 19a, and "MODE" is set to "E6H", and various types are used. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol first display 19a is started. The designated command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S208, the first special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special figure variation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern 01 designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the loss with the fluctuation time of 8 seconds in the non-time saving game state, the jackpot with the fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the non-time saving game state. There is a first special symbol variation pattern 06 designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of.

The "second special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol first display 19b, and "MODE" is set to "E7H", and various types are used. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command specifies the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol first display 19b is started. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S208, the second special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special figure variation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the second special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern 41 designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the loss with the fluctuation time of 10 seconds in the time-saving game state, and the jackpot fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the time-saving game state. There is a second special symbol variation pattern 46 designation command corresponding to the pattern.
In the present embodiment, the "first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" and the "second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special figure fluctuation pattern designation command".

The "starting opening winning designation command" is information indicating the result of determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance, and when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 10, "MODE" is set to "E8H". When based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information.

This start opening prize designation command is produced and controlled by the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the determined start win prize information (preliminary determination result) when the game ball wins in the first start opening 10 or the second start opening 11a. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, in step S139 or step S159, the start port winning designation command corresponding to the determined winning information is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the start port winning designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "open maximum count designation command" indicates the maximum number of winnings (10) to the large winning opening 13a in one round game, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and "DATA" is "0AH". Is set to.
In this open maximum count designation command, the open maximum designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when one round game is started. Immediately after that, the open maximum count designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of jackpot rounds according to various jackpot types, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the number of jackpot rounds. ..

In this round designation command, when one round game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of started rounds is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a is opened in step S285 or step S296, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds when the opening / closing member 13b is opened is sent to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set. Immediately after that, the round designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the production control board 130. As the round designation command, when the first round game is performed, the first round game is performed. When the second round designation command is transmitted and the second round game is performed, there is an open second round designation command.

The "large winning opening closing designation command (interval designation command)" indicates that the closing period (interval) of the large winning opening 13a between rounds is set, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and "DATA". Is set to "7FH".
This big winning opening closing designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the closing period (interval) of the big winning opening 13a between rounds starts. Specifically, in step S288, the large winning opening closing designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the large winning opening closing designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "opening designation command" indicates that various jackpot games (special game states) are started, "MODE" is set to "EBH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot. ..

In this opening designation command, when various jackpots start, the opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S274, the opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the opening designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the opening designation command, for example, there is a probability variation jackpot opening designation command when a probability variation jackpot is performed, and a normal jackpot opening designation command when a normal jackpot is performed.

The "ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have been completed, "MODE" is set by "ECH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot.

In this ending designation command, when various jackpots are completed, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game end process in step S298, the ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the ending designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the ending specification command, there is a probability variation jackpot ending specification command in the case of a probability variation jackpot, and a normal jackpot ending specification command in the case of a normal jackpot.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 19c. "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the DATA is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Information is set.
In this normal symbol designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in step S347, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal map designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 19c, and "MODE" is set to "EEH" to match the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols. DATA information is set.
In this normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the normal symbol first display 19c is started, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol is used as the effect control board. It is sent to 130. Specifically, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started in step S349, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Will be done. Immediately after that, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "ordinary symbol storage specification command" indicates the number of pending storages stored in the ordinary symbol retention number (G) storage area, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA is set according to the number of reserved symbols. Information is set.
In this normal symbol storage designation command, when the number of hold storages stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is switched, the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the hold storage number is transmitted to the effect control board 130. .. Specifically, when the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area increases or decreases in step S177 or step S345, the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of hold storages after the increase or decrease is the main. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "game state designation command" indicates the game state of whether or not it is in a high-probability game state and whether or not it is in a time-saving game state. "MODE" is set to "FAH", and the low-probability game state is set. In addition, "DATA" is set to "10H" in the non-time-saving game state, and "DATA" is set to "11H" in the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state, and the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state. If so, "DATA" is set to "12H", and if it is in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, "DATA" is set to "13H".

This game state specification command is produced by the game state specification command corresponding to the game state at the time of executing the initialization process, at the start of the change of the special symbol, at the end of the change of the special symbol, at the start of the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot. It is transmitted to the control board 130. Specifically, when the RAM clear process (initialization process) is performed in step S13, when the variation display of the special symbol is started in step S210, the high-probability game flag and the high-probability game are played in step S263. When there is a possibility that the number of times, the time-saving game flag and the time-saving game number (J) have changed, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game number, the time-saving game flag and the time-saving game number (J) are set in step S326. Occasionally, a game state specification command corresponding to the current game state is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the game state designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In the "power-on designation command" and "power recovery designation command", when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command is sent to the effect control board 130 according to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized. Will be sent.
The power-on designation command indicates that the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "00H". There is. Specifically, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on and the information stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared (step S15 in FIG. 14). ..

The power restoration designation command indicates that the power on to the gaming machine 1 does not involve the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the gaming state when "MODE" is set to "FBH" and the power is cut off is set. , "DATA" is set to "01H" in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and "DATA" is set to "02H" in the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state. In addition, "DATA" is set to "03H" in the non-time-saving gaming state, and "DATA" is set to "04H" in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S19 in FIG. 14).

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state is set in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "05H". It is set.
In this customer waiting state designation command, when the customer waiting state is entered in step S217, the customer waiting state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and immediately thereafter, the effect transmission data is set in step S393. The customer waiting state specification command set in the storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "set value designation command" indicates the set value set in the gaming machine 1, and specifically, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command is issued. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set to "FDH", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when a game ball is won in the second starting port 11a, when it is detected by the magnetic detection switch 58a or the radio wave detection switch 58b, when it is detected by the prize confirmation detection switch 58e, or when the opening / closing door 3 is opened. When the saucer 5 is full, when a payout abnormality occurs, or the like, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Specifically, when a magnetic / radio wave abnormality is determined in step S109, an abnormal winning is determined in S126, or an illegal entry is determined in S157, the opening / closing door 3 is opened by the payout control board 120. When it is detected that the saucer 5 is full or the game ball for paying out is insufficient, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the error specification command, there are a magnetic anomaly error specification command corresponding to a magnetic anomaly and a full anomaly error specification command corresponding to the fullness of the saucer 5.

The "error cancellation specification command" indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set to "FEH", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.
In this error release designation command, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the opening / closing door 3 is closed, when the saucer 5 is full, or when the payout abnormality is resolved.

Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects that the opening / closing door 3 is closed, the saucer 5 is full, and the game ball shortage for payout is resolved, an error cancellation designation corresponding to the type of error canceled is specified. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S393 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing transmission timing of various commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140).
As described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, for example, a preset command is set when a low-probability non-time-saving game state is set and a variation display of the first special symbol is started based on a jackpot determination result. Based on the transmission order, the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command, and the special symbol storage designation command are continuously transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The effect control board 130 (image control unit 140) displays the effect display image on the image display device 18 based on various received commands. While the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is performed every 4 ms on the main control board 110 as described above, the image control unit 140 performs a frame update process (V blank) for displaying an image on the image display device 16 described later. Since the interrupt process (FIG. 48)) is performed every 33 ms, the effect control board 130 receives the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command, and the special symbol storage designation command as a set. Therefore, the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command, and the special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 are transmitted substantially at the same time.

In the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140), the image display device 16 is based on the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command, and the special symbol storage designation command transmitted substantially simultaneously from the main control board 110. Display the production display image of the fluctuation effect of the jackpot in

When a special symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the special symbol is completed, the combination confirmation stop indicating that the three effect symbols 16a being displayed in the variation display on the image display device 16 is a big hit. The jackpot effect symbol image to be displayed is displayed.
After displaying the jackpot effect symbol image in the fixed stop display state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), when starting the opening game, the game state designation command (including right-handed information) and the opening game are started from the main control board 110. When the designated command is transmitted, the opening effect image and the right-handed promotion image, which will be described later, are displayed based on the opening designated command.

When each round designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 each time the round game of each round is started, the image display device 16 displays the round effect image of each round. After that, when the ending designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the final round game is completed, the ending effect image is displayed on the image display device 16 based on the ending designation command.

When various commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 are grouped, the effect symbol specification command, the special variation pattern specification command, the special symbol storage specification command, and the special symbol confirmation command are displayed as the variation of the special symbol. The first group is the related command, and the first starting port winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command are the second group as the command related to the starting winning, and the normal symbol designation command related to the variable display of the normal symbol, The normal symbol variation pattern designation command and the normal symbol memory designation command are in the third group, the opening designation command, the round designation command, and the ending designation command related to the jackpot game are in the fourth group, and the various error designation commands related to the error are in the fourth group. The 5th group, the power-on specification command related to the occurrence of power failure, and the power supply system command of the power recovery specification command are the 6th group of various error specification commands.

Note that power off is a type of error that affects the progress of the game being executed because the progress of the game is interrupted when the power is cut off. The command may be the same sixth group as the various error specification commands.

Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130m will be described.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the effect control unit 130 m.
When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub 130a performs the following main processing.
In step S510, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits the timer interrupt process.
In step S520, the sub CPU 130a performs the initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b and initializes and sets the flags stored in the sub RAM 130c in response to the power being turned on.

At this time, the sub CPU 130a includes the image display devices 16 and 18, the audio output device 9, the effect button device 6A (button drive motor 6c, button vibration motor 6d, button light emitting LED 6e), and the panel drive device 17 (movable effect member 17A, It controls a stepping motor), a panel lighting device 18, a frame lighting device 27, and the like. Then, after receiving the initialization OK signal for the initialization instruction signal from both the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the process proceeds to step S530.

In step S530, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that allows timer interruption.
In step S540, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect random number update process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S540 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the effect control unit 130 m.
Although not shown, a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130 m generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (2 ms), reads a timer interrupt processing program, and interrupts the timer in the effect control unit 130 m. The process is executed.

In step S601, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.
In step S602, the sub CPU 130a updates various timer counters used by the effect control unit 130m.
In step S603, the sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer. After that, the analysis process of the command received in step S603 is performed.

In step S604, the sub CPU 130a checks the detection signal of the effect button detection switch 6b, and performs the effect input control process related to the effect button 6a.
In step S605, the sub CPU 130a includes the special symbol second display 20a, 20b, the normal symbol second display 20c, the special symbol hold second display 20d, 20e, the normal symbol hold second display 20f, and the right-handed second display. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the display 20g is performed.

In step S606, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the liquid crystal control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Further, the display output process for outputting the signal of the display control data created in step S605 is performed.
In step S607, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing)
37 and 38 are flowcharts for explaining the command analysis process by the effect control unit 130m.
As shown in FIG. 37, first, in step S610, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not there is a command in the receive buffer, and confirms whether or not the command has been received.
If there is no command in the receive buffer (step S610; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the command analysis process, and if there is a command in the receive buffer (step S610; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S611.

Next, in step S611, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error specification command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is an error specification command (step S611; Yes), the process is transferred to step S612, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not an error specification command (step S611; Yes). Step S611; No), the process is transferred to step S613.

In step S612, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process for notifying that an error related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification processing, the type of the error specification command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of the error that has occurred is determined, the determined error notification effect is set in the error notification effect storage area, and the determined error notification effect is determined. In order to transmit the information of the above to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, an error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S613, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error release designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is an error release specification command (step S613; Yes), the process is transferred to step S614, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not an error release specification command. In the case (step S613; No), the process is transferred to step S617.

In step S614, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification release process for canceling the error notification during execution. In this error notification release processing, the type of the error release specification command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the resolved error type is cleared from the error notification effect storage area, and the release information of the resolved error notification effect is released from the image control unit. 140, In order to transmit to the lamp control unit 150, an error notification release designation command based on the resolved error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S617, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power-on designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is the power-on designation command (step S617; Yes), the process is transferred to step S618, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not the power-on designation command. In the case (step S617; No), the process is transferred to step S619.

In step S618, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on, the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), and the information of the power-on effect for notifying that the power is turned on is sent to the image control unit 140 and the lamp. In order to transmit to the control unit 150, the power-on notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S619, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery designation command (step S619; Yes), the process is transferred to step S620, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not a power recovery designation command. In the case (step S619; No), the process is transferred to S621.

In step S620, the sub CPU 130a performs a power restoration process. In this process, in order to transmit the information of the power restoration effect for notifying that the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on and the power is turned on to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the power restoration notification designation command is subordinated. Set in the transmission buffer of RAM 130c.

In step S621, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state specification command (step S621; Yes), the process is transferred to step S622, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not a customer waiting command. In the case (step S621; No), the process is transferred to step S631.

In step S622, the sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing. In this process, 30 seconds or 60 seconds after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo image is displayed on the first image display device 16 or the second image display device 18, or the power saving image is displayed. ..

In step S623, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol memory specification command (step S623; Yes), the process is transferred to step S624, and the command stored in the receive buffer must be a special symbol memory specification command. If it is determined (step S623; No), the process is transferred to step S631.

In step S624, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the special figure hold storage number from the special symbol storage designation command, and sets the analyzed special figure hold storage number in the special figure hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. I do.

In step S631, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command. If it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is the start opening prize designation command (step S631; Yes), the process is transferred to step S632, and the command stored in the reception buffer must be the start opening prize designation command. If it is determined (step S631; No), the process is transferred to step S641.

In step S632, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command and executes the data update process corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command. The start opening prize designation command is associated with information related to jackpots and losses that are tentatively determined by the pre-determination process. Therefore, here, the information about the newly reserved first hold (U1) or second hold (U2) is stored in the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S633, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the start opening winning designation command and performs a hold display mode determination process of transmitting the hold display command to the image control unit 140 in order to perform the hold display in a predetermined mode. As a result, the first image display device 16 displays the current number of holds of the first hold (U1) and the second hold (U2).

In step S641, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is a variable pattern specification command (step S641; Yes), the process is transferred to step S642, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not a variable pattern specification command. In the case (step S641; No), the process is transferred to step S651.

In step S642, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining one variation effect pattern from a plurality of types of variation effect patterns based on the received variation pattern designation command.
In step S643, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the advance notice effect when the advance notice effect is executed by the so-called effect lottery set for each variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S642. Performs the advance notice effect determination process for determining the type (for example, symbol advance notice effect, music advance notice effect, etc.).

In order to transmit the type of the advance notice effect determined to be executed in step S643 to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the type of the advance notice effect to be executed is set in the transmission data storage area. do. When the advance notice effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150, the effect button device 6A, the audio output device 9, the image display devices 16 and 18, and the panel drive device 17 are based on the advance notice effect designation command. , The panel lighting device 18, and the frame lighting device 27 are controlled.

In step S651, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command. The effect symbol designation command is set in steps S227 and S229 of the main control board 110.
When the sub CPU 130a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the effect symbol designation command (step S651; Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S652, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the effect symbol designation command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S651; No), the process proceeds to step S661.

In step S652, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect symbol determination process for determining the effect symbol 16a to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 16 based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command. In this process, the effect symbol designation command is analyzed to determine the effect symbol data constituting the combination of the effect symbols 16a according to the presence or absence of the jackpot and the type of the jackpot, and the determined effect symbol data is stored in the effect symbol storage area. set.

In step S661, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol confirmation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol confirmation command (step S661; Yes), the process is transferred to step S662, and it is determined that the command stored in the reception buffer is not a special symbol confirmation command. In the case (step S661; No), the process is transferred to step S671.

In step S662, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. In this process, in order to stop and display the fluctuation of the effect symbol, the data based on the effect symbol data determined in step S652 and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 16a are set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. do.

In step 671, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command. If it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol memory specification command (step S671; Yes), the process is transferred to step S672, and the command stored in the receive buffer must be a normal symbol memory specification command. If it is determined (step S671; No), the process is transferred to step S681.

In step S672, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the normal symbol hold storage number from the normal symbol storage designation command, and displays the analyzed normal symbol hold storage number on the normal symbol hold second display 20c. Is set in a predetermined processing area.

As shown in FIG. 38, in step S681, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal figure variation pattern designation command. If it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal map variation pattern specification command (step S681; Yes), the process is transferred to step S672, and the command stored in the receive buffer is the normal map variation pattern specification command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S681; No), the process proceeds to step S681.
In step S682, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal map variation effect pattern determination process for determining one normal map variation effect pattern from a plurality of types of normal map variation effect patterns based on the received normal map variation pattern designation command. ..

In step S691, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command (step S691; Yes), the process is transferred to step S692, and it is determined that the command stored in the reception buffer is not a normal symbol confirmation command. In the case (step S691; No), the process is transferred to step S700.

In step S692, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal symbol fluctuation stop process. In this process, in order to stop and display the normal symbol effect symbol, the effect symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol confirmation command and the stop instruction data for stop display the normal symbol effect symbol are set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. do.

In step S700, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the reception buffer is the game state specification command (step S700; Yes), the process is transferred to step S701, and it is determined that the command stored in the reception buffer is not the game state specification command. In the case (step S700; No), the process is transferred to step S711.
In step S701, the sub CPU 130a sets the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 130c.

In step S711, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command (step S711; Yes), the process is transferred to step S712, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not the opening designation command (step S711; Yes). Step S711; No), the process is transferred to step S721.

In step S712, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot start effect pattern. In this process, the jackpot start effect pattern is determined based on the opening designation command, the determined jackpot start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot effect pattern is controlled by the image control unit 140 and the lamp. The corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the unit 150.

In step S721, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command (step S721; Yes), the process is transferred to step S722, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not a round designation command (step S721; Yes). Step S721; No), the process is transferred to step S731.

In step S722, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect pattern determination process during the round to determine the jackpot effect pattern. In this process, the effect pattern during the round is determined for each round to be started, based on the round designation command having information about how many round games are started. Then, the determined effect pattern during the round is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. ..

In step S731, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending designation command. When it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is the ending specification command (step S731; Yes), the process is transferred to step S732, and it is determined that the command stored in the receive buffer is not the ending specification command (step S731; Yes). Step S731; No), the command analysis process is terminated.

In step S732, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In this process, the jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending designation command, the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot end effect pattern is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control. The corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the unit 150.

(Special figure hold memory update process)
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a special figure hold storage update process by the effect control unit 130 m.
In step S741, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the special symbol storage designation command determined to have been received in step S623, and holds the special symbol of the sub RAM 130c based on the content of the confirmed special symbol storage designation command in step S742. Set the number of special symbol reservations in the memory counter.

In step S743, the sub CPU 130a causes the first special symbol hold second display 20d or the second special symbol hold second display 20e to display the first hold number or the second hold number (LED lights or blinks). The first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data of the above is set in a predetermined processing area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S605, and the created data is output in step S606. By doing so, the first hold number or the second hold number is displayed on the first special symbol hold second display 20d or the second special symbol hold second display 20e.

In step S744, the sub CPU 130a specifies the special symbol storage received from the main control board 110 in order to display the first reserved number or the second reserved number in the first reserved number display area 16e or the second reserved number display area 16f. Based on the command, the special symbol hold number display specification command generated to display the first hold number in the first hold number display area 16e of the image display device 16 or the second hold number display area 162 in the second hold number display area 162 is subordinated. It is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 130c, and the current special figure hold storage update process is completed.

The special symbol hold number display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the image control unit 140 causes the first reserved number display area 16e to display the first special symbol reserved number or the second reserved number display area 16f to display the second special symbol reserved number. If the power-restoring image is being displayed, the first special symbol hold number or the second hold is placed in the first hold number display area 16e so that the power-restoring image can be visually recognized after a lapse of a predetermined time. The second special symbol reserved number is restored and displayed in the number display area 16f. The special symbol storage designation command received from the main control board 110 may be transmitted to the image control unit 140 without generating the special symbol hold number display designation command.

(Variable effect pattern determination process)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control base 130 m.
The variation effect pattern determination process is executed by the sub CPU 130a when the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer. In this variation effect pattern determination process, various effect devices (effect button device 6A, audio output device 9, panel drive device 17, panel illumination) including image display devices 16 and 18 are performed during the variation display of the special symbol. A variation effect pattern indicating how to control the device 18 and the frame lighting device 27) is determined.

In step S801, the sub CPU 130a acquires the effect random value updated in step S520.
Next, in step S802, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern determination table with reference to the current gaming state and the effect mode.
The effect mode notifies the currently set game state. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, a normal mode for notifying that the current game state is the low-probability non-time-saving game state is set, and in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the current game state is set. Set a probability variation mode for notifying that is in a high-probability time-saving game state, and set a time-saving mode for notifying that the current gaming state is in a low-probability time-saving game state when in a low-probability time-saving game state.

In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, for example, the effect image for notifying the current game state is displayed on the image display device 16 and / or the hold icon image to be displayed on the image display device 16. By making the display mode of the variable icon image, the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol 16a different from the display mode in the other effect modes, the current gaming state is notified.

For example, in the normal mode, a background image in the image of a mountain, and an effect design image in a display mode composed of numbers (identification section) and character image (decorative section) are displayed, while in the probability variation mode, the effect pattern image is displayed. A background image imagining the sea and an effect design image of a display mode composed of only numbers (identification unit) are displayed. Further, while the right-handed promotion image (the image of "right-handed →") is displayed in the probability variation mode and the time saving mode, the right-handed promoted image is not displayed in the normal mode.

In step S803, the sub CPU 130a determines the variation effect pattern of 1 based on the variation effect pattern determination table set in step S802 and the effect random value acquired in step S801.

Next, in step S804, the sub CPU 130a sets a variation effect pattern designation command in the transmission data storage area in order to transmit the variation effect pattern determined in step S803 to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. When the variation effect pattern specification command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150, the effect button device 6A, the audio output device 9, the image display devices 16 and 18, and the panel drive are based on the variation effect pattern specification command. The device 17, the panel lighting device 18, and the frame lighting device 27 are controlled.

In step S805, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect time, which is the effect time corresponding to the variation effect pattern determined in step S803, in the variation effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c, and in step S806, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect. The variation effect data corresponding to the pattern is set in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The fluctuation effect timer counter is subtracted by 1 every 4 ms in step S602. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the variation effect, by the variation effect timer counter.

In step S807, the sub CPU 130a performs the hold icon display update process. Specifically, whether or not to change the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal display) based on the icon change scenario determined in the hold display mode determination process in step S633. The display mode after the change of the heel is determined, the hold icon change designation command corresponding to this decision is specified, and the specified hold icon change designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

The hold icon change designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the image control unit 140.

In step S808, the sub CPU 130a performs the variable icon display mode determination process. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S803, whether or not to change the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal display) and the display mode after the change. Is determined, the variable icon designation command corresponding to this decision is specified, and the specified variable icon designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the variable effect pattern determination process this time is completed.

The variable icon designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the variable icon in a display mode corresponding to the variable icon designation command.

In step S809, the sub CPU 130a determines special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display 20a or the second special symbol second display 20b to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED). Set in the processing area of. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S605, and the created data is output in step S606, so that the first special symbol first. 2 The variable display of the display 20a or the second special symbol 2nd display 20b is started.

In step S810, the sub CPU 130a sets a special symbol variation display designation command for variable display of the special symbol in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

The special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the image control unit 140 performs variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol variation display area TZ.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
Various tables stored in the sub ROM 130b will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
41 and 42 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol 16a. In the variation effect pattern determination table, the current game state, the variation pattern specification command received from the main control board 110, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and the determined variation effect pattern are associated with each other. FIG. 41 is a loss variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a loss, and FIG. 42 is a jackpot variation effect pattern determination that is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It's a table.

The variable effect pattern is an image display device 16, 18, an effect button device 6A, a selection button device 6B, an audio output device 9, a panel drive device 17, a panel lighting device 18, and a frame during variable display of a special symbol. It is an effect mode of a variable effect performed by using various effect devices such as a lighting device 27, and an effect configuration (effect mode) such as the content of a reach effect is described.

For example, when the variation effect pattern determination table for loss in FIG. 41 is used to determine the variation effect pattern, the current game state is "non-time saving game state" and the variation pattern designation command is "E6H, 05H". The variable effect pattern 08 is determined at a rate of 40%, the variable effect pattern 09 is determined at a rate of 30%, the variable effect pattern 10 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variable effect pattern 10 is determined at a rate of 10%. 11 is determined.

Here, the "normal variation" indicates that a normal variation effect (effect time: 8 seconds) of a reachless loss in which a reach state does not occur due to the effect symbol is performed.
"Long fluctuation" means that the production time is longer than the normal fluctuation production (production time: 8 seconds) (production time: 10 seconds), and a long fluctuation production with no reach and no reach state is performed. There is.
"Shortened variation" means that the effect time is shorter than the normal variation effect (effect time: 8 seconds) (effect time: 4 seconds), and the shortened variation effect of no reach loss that does not cause a reach state is performed. doing.
"Ultra-shortening fluctuation" means that the production time is shorter than the shortened fluctuation production (production time: 4 seconds) (production time: 3 seconds), and the super-shortening fluctuation production of reachless loss that does not cause a reach state is performed. Shown.

"Normal reach" means that the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area of the display unit of the first image display device 16, and a reach state occurs in which the remaining one effect symbol fluctuates in the center area. It is shown that the SP reach effect or the normal reach effect in which the SPSP reach effect is not executed is executed.
The “SP reach” indicates that the effect symbol is reduced, the reduced effect symbol is moved closer to the end of the display portion, and the SP reach effect that is expected to execute the jackpot game is executed. As the SP reach effect, for example, a fan effect of whether or not a ally character becomes a big hit is performed.
"SPSP reach" means that the effect symbol that is changing in the variable display area of the display unit of the image display device 16 is reduced, the reduced effect symbol is moved closer to the end of the display unit, and the jackpot game is executed. It shows that the expected SPSP reach effect is executed. As the SPSP reach production, a production in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle with each other and a mission production in which a commanded mission is performed are performed.
"Full rotation reach" means that scrolling is performed at a low speed in a state where the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit of the image display device 16 have the same display mode of the effect symbols, and the jackpot game is executed. It shows that the full rotation reach effect that performs a special effect indicating that is executed.

The jackpot expectation of each reach effect is set to increase in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full rotation reach effect (big hit confirmed).

(Data creation process)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a data creation process by the effect control unit 130m.
In step S810, the sub CPU 130a is the first special symbol second display 20a or the second based on the special symbol variation display data and the special symbol stop display data set in the variation effect pattern determination process or the effect symbol variation stop process. Display control data for the special symbol second display corresponding to the special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing the LED of the special symbol second display 20b is created.

In step S811, the sub CPU 130a lights the LED of the normal symbol second display 20c based on the normal symbol fluctuation display data and the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol roulette effect determination process or the normal symbol variation stop process. , Create display control data for the second display of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol display signal for blinking or turning off.

In step S812, the sub CPU 130a uses the LEDs of the first special symbol hold second display 20d and the second special symbol hold second display 20e based on the special symbol hold display data set in the special symbol hold storage update process. Create display control data for the special symbol hold second display corresponding to the special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off.

In step S813, the sub CPU 130a displays the normal symbol hold display for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED of the normal symbol hold second display 20f based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the normal symbol hold storage update process. Create display control data for the second display with normal symbol hold corresponding to the signal.

In step S814, the sub CPU 130a is based on the right-handed display data or right-handed erase data set in the game state setting process in response to the game state designation command received from the main control board 110 at the start of fluctuation or when the power is restored. Right-handed second display Display control data for the right-handed second display corresponding to the right-handed display signal for turning on or off the LED of 20 g is created. Also. The sub CPU 130a lights the LED of the right-handed second indicator 20 g based on the right-handed display data set in the jackpot effect pattern determination process in response to the opening designation command received from the main control board 110 at the start of the jackpot game. The display control data for the right-handed second display corresponding to the right-handed display signal to be displayed is created.

(Data output processing)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a data output process by the effect control unit 130 m.
In step S820, the sub CPU 130a includes the first special symbol 2nd indicator 20a, the 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 20b, the normal symbol 2nd indicator 20c, the 1st special symbol hold 2nd indicator 20d, and the 2nd special. A display that outputs various display control data created in steps S810 to S814 above in order to light the LEDs of the symbol hold second display 20e, the normal symbol hold second display 20f, and the right-handed second display 20g. Performs dexterous output processing.

In step S821, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170.

(Display example of the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device)
(Specific example of display result of each display)
A specific example of the display result stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display on the special symbol first display, the special symbol second display, and the first image display device 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

First, the details of the variable display of various symbols performed before the display result is derived on each display will be described.

In the first game information display device 19, the first special symbol first display 19a and the second special symbol first display 19b have six LEDs (light emitting units) that serve as a special symbol display area when the power is turned on (RAM clear). The left end of is lit (the initial symbol in the same mode as the lost special symbol is displayed), and the special symbol is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition.
The configuration of the first special symbol first display 19a shown in FIG. 45 is such that the posture is changed from the tilted posture actually equipped in the gaming machine 1 to the horizontal posture for convenience of explanation. Hereinafter, the right side and the left side when viewed from the player side will be described as the right side and the left side.

As shown in FIG. 45, the variation display of the special symbol is performed by changing the lighting positions of the six LEDs in the special symbol first display 19a.
Specifically, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the lighting is started from the leftmost LED, and the lighting position is 1 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the leftmost LED toward the rightmost LED. The chain-type lighting display that moves one by one is repeated for a predetermined fluctuation time. In this chain-type lighting display, when switching from the lighting LED to the lighting of the next LED, the lighting end timing of the lighting LED and the lighting start timing of the next LED overlap. FIG. 45 shows that the lighting end timing of the first LED and the lighting start timing of the second LED overlap.

When the lit LED goes out in response to the LED lighting position switching process being executed, the voltage does not immediately become "0" even if the lit LED is switched from ON to OFF. The lighting end timing of the LED being lit and the lighting start timing of the next LED overlap. As a result, switching from the LED being lit to the lighting of the next LED can be performed in a chained manner so as to flow seamlessly. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not knowing the state of (the fact that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner).

After the variable display of the special symbol is performed, one or a plurality of LEDs are finally turned on to stop and display the loss special symbol indicating that the special symbol is lost or the jackpot special symbol indicating that the special symbol is a jackpot.
The lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 19a remains stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started on the 1st special symbol 1st display 19a. The lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol that has been maintained and stopped and displayed on the second special symbol 1st display 20a remains stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started on the 2nd special symbol 1st display 19a. It is designed to maintain the state of.

In the second game information display device 20, in the first special symbol second display 20a and the second special symbol second display 20b, one LED, which is the fourth symbol display area, is turned off when the power is turned on (RAM clear). The initial fourth symbol, which is the same as the lost fourth symbol indicating that it is lost, is displayed), and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, one LED is turned off and turned on repeatedly in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally the LED is turned off and the loss indicating that the LED is lost. The fourth jackpot symbol indicating that is stopped and displayed. The LED lighting cycle may be earlier than the LED lighting cycle (0.25 seconds) of the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b of the first game information display device 19.

Then, the lost 4th symbol or the jackpot 4th symbol, which was stopped and displayed on the 1st special symbol 2nd display 20a, was stopped and displayed until the next variable display was started on the 1st special symbol 2nd display 20a. The lost 4th symbol or jackpot 4th symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 20b while maintaining the same state until the next variable display is started on the 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 20b. Is designed to remain stopped and displayed.

In the first image display device 16, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), the three effect symbols 16a (lost effect symbols and jackpot effect symbols) predetermined in the effect symbol display area (left side area, center area, right side area) are (Different initial effect symbols) are displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the three effect symbols 16a are scrolled in the vertical direction, and finally the three effect symbols 16a are displayed in a combination indicating that they are lost or in a combination indicating that they are big hits. It is stopped and displayed with the jackpot effect design.
The initial effect symbols are displayed in a combination indicating that the three effect symbols 16a are lost, but the display is a combination display dedicated to the initial effect symbols that is not selected when the three effect symbols 16a are lost.

Then, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started, until the customer waiting effect is executed, and until the jackpot game is executed. When the customer waiting effect is executed or the jackpot game is executed, the state is not displayed in the effect symbol display area.

Further, in the first image display device 16, when the power is turned on (RAM is cleared), a special symbol (a lost special symbol indicating a loss or a jackpot special symbol indicating a jackpot) defined in advance in the special symbol display area TZ is used. Is in a state of displaying a different initial special symbol), and the variable display of the special symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the variable display of the display change is performed by sequentially switching the numbers "1" to "9" constituting the special symbol, and finally, the lost special symbol indicating that it is a loss. Or, the jackpot special symbol indicating that it is a jackpot is stopped and displayed.
The initial special symbol is displayed in a combination indicating that it is lost, but the display is a combination display dedicated to the initial special symbol that is not selected when the initial special symbol is lost.

Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area TZ is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started, the customer waiting effect is executed, and the jackpot game is executed. When the customer waiting effect is executed or the jackpot game is executed, the state is not displayed in the special symbol display area TZ.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a specific example of the display result which is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1st display and the special symbol 2nd indicator as a result of the variable display will be described.
The configuration of the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b shown in FIG. 46 is such that the posture is changed from the tilted posture actually equipped in the gaming machine 1 to the horizontal posture for convenience of explanation. Hereinafter, the right side and the left side when viewed from the player side will be described as the right side and the left side.

On the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b, one of the display results indicating one type of lost special symbol and the display result indicating six types of jackpot special symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the loss special symbol, one LED at the right end is turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear). That is, the combination of the display result showing the lost special symbol of the first special symbol 1st display 19a and the display result showing the lost special symbol of the second special symbol 1st display 19b is a combination of three effect symbols indicating that the lost special symbol is lost. Regardless, the same display result will always be obtained.

On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, 2 to 5 LEDs are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off.
For example, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot first special symbol (special symbol 01), the first LED from the left end is turned off and the remaining LEDs are turned on. Further, for example, in the case of the 4R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol 03), the first, third, and fourth LEDs from the left end are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off. As described above, the type of the jackpot symbol is indicated by the combination of turning on and off each of the six predetermined LEDs.

For example, in the image display device 16, the combination display of three effect symbols 16a indicating that it is a 4R normal jackpot and the combination display of three effect symbols 16a indicating that it is a 4R normal jackpot including promotion of a 4R probability variation jackpot are displayed. Even if the same combination is displayed, the special symbol first display 19a and 19b displays a combination of lighting and extinguishing of 6 LEDs corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot at the time of the 4R normal jackpot, including promotion of the 4R probability variation jackpot. At the time of 4R normal jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the six LEDs corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot is displayed, and the same combination is not displayed.
On the other hand, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, there is only one type of combination display of the three effect symbols 16a, and there is only one type of combination of lighting and extinguishing of the six LEDs corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot.

In the special symbol second display 20a and 20b, one of the display result indicating one type of lost fourth symbol and the display result indicating one type of jackpot fourth symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost fourth symbol, one LED is turned off as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear). On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot fourth symbol, one LED is lit. That is, the special symbol second indicators 20a and 20b cannot suggest the type of jackpot.

In the effect symbol display area of the first image display device 16, one of a display result showing a plurality of types of lost effect symbols and a display result showing 10 types of jackpot effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost effect symbol, the three effect symbols 16a are in a non-identical combination (separate stitch) and stopped at a combination other than the combination of the initial effect symbols.
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot effect symbol, the three effect symbols 16a are stopped in the same combination (9 types of 111 to 999) or a specific combination (753) that is not the same combination. In addition, in the case of loss, it is not stopped by the above-mentioned specific combination.

In the special symbol display area TZ of the first image display device 16, one of a display result showing a plurality of types of lost special symbols and a display result showing 10 types of jackpot special symbols is derived and displayed. That is, the display result showing the lost special symbol is the same as the combination display of the numbers constituting the lost effect symbol, and the display result showing the jackpot special symbol is the same as the combination display of the numbers indicating the jackpot effect symbol.

As explained above, while there are multiple types of display results that show the special jackpot symbol, there is only one type of display result that shows the special loss symbol, so if you remember only the display result that shows the special loss symbol, you will get a big hit. It becomes possible to easily determine whether it is a loss or a loss. If the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol is smaller than the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol, the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol may be two or more.

In addition, while the display result showing the special loss symbol lights up only one LED, the display result showing the special jackpot symbol lights up two or more LEDs, so it is easy to determine whether the hit is a big hit or a loss. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, since there are multiple types of display results (LED lighting modes) for each jackpot special symbol, it is difficult to instantly determine which type of jackpot game is to be executed, and which type of jackpot game is to be executed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the LED.

Further, when the fluctuation starts, the leftmost LED shown in FIG. 46 is always lit, and when the display result indicating the loss special symbol is derived and displayed, an LED different from the LED lit at the start of the fluctuation is lit. Even when the time is extremely short, it is possible to recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has been performed.

In addition, when the display result indicating the loss specific symbol is derived and displayed, only one LED is lit, whereas when the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed, two or more LEDs are always lit. It is possible to reliably distinguish between the variable display of the special symbol of the loss and the variable display of the special symbol of the jackpot.

(About the display mode of the special symbol 1st display when the power is cut off and after the power is restored)
In the special symbol first display 19a and 19b, the special symbol is fluctuated by blinking the above-mentioned six LEDs according to the chain lighting pattern, and the blinking operation according to the chain lighting pattern is repeated according to the fluctuation time. ..

By the way, for example, when a power failure occurs while the LED is lit in the first special symbol first display 19a, the lit LED is not turned off immediately but is turned off after a predetermined minute time has elapsed. When the power is cut off, the LED that is lit is not switched from ON to OFF, but is forcibly turned off. Therefore, from the time when the voltage starts to drop until the lighting status when the power is cut off is backed up. Since the voltage becomes "0" via the threshold value, it takes time until the power supply becomes "0", and the LED keeps lighting until then.
Therefore, the time until the LED that was lit when the power is cut off is longer than the time until the LED that is lit is turned off by the above-mentioned switching process during the variable display.

When the power is restored, the backup process identifies the LED that was lit when the power was cut off, so the LED that was lit when the power was cut off is restarted. Since the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b is the basic information that controls the progress of the game, the main control board 110 stores all the information related to the basic information when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power is restored, the display state when the power is cut off can be restored so as not to hinder the progress of the game.
When the power is restored, the normal symbol 1st display 19c also resumes lighting from the LED that was lit when the power was cut off.
If the power is cut off while the special symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the timing at which the LEDs of the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b are turned on when the power is restored. At the same timing, the LED of the high-probability game state display 19g or the time-saving game state display 19h lights up.

(Main processing of image control unit)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the main processing by the image control unit 140.
In step S830, the centralized CPU 141 sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupts.
Next, in step S831, the centralized CPU 141 reads the main processing program from the centralized ROM 143 and performs initialization processing such as initializing the flags and the like stored in the centralized RAM 142.

In step S832, the centralized CPU 141 sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption.
Next, in step S833, the general CPU 141 refers to, for example, the state (switch position) of the changeover switch that can be operated by the game clerk, and refers to the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the image display device. A mode switching process for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the brightness (value) of the 16 and 18 and various lighting devices (panel lighting device 23, frame lighting device 27) is performed.

In step S834, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130 m with reference to the receive buffer of the control RAM 142, and if not (step S834; No), the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the effect command command is received. When the process is transferred to step S833 and received (step S834; Yes), in step S835, an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command, and a predetermined area of the control RAM 142 is determined. Performs the setting process of the animation pattern to be set (set) to.

The production instruction command includes a customer waiting effect command for instructing the execution of the customer waiting effect, an icon display command for instructing the addition of a hold display or a change in the display mode, and a variable effect pattern command for instructing the execution of the variable effect. A symbol pattern command that specifies the type of effect symbol (hit / miss), a command for the advance notice effect that instructs the execution of the advance notice effect, an operation promotion command that instructs the execution of the button effect, and an opening effect that instructs the execution of the opening effect. Command, round effect command to instruct execution of round effect, ending effect command to instruct execution of ending effect, power-on effect command to instruct execution of power-on effect, power recovery instruction to execute power recovery effect Examples include production commands and error production commands that instruct error notification.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and weight frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the production image, etc. are bundled. Is a group formed by.

The types of animation groups include, for example, a group of effect symbols for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 16a, a group of icons for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the variable icon, and an animation of the variable effect such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable effect group for displaying, a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a jackpot effect group for displaying an animation of a jackpot effect.

In step S836, the control CPU 141 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command. The types of sound groups include, for example, a BGM group for producing a variable effect, an SE (sound effect) group for producing a predetermined effect, a BGM group for producing a jackpot game, and an error sound group for performing error notification. And so on.

In step S837, the control CPU 141 switches the frame indicating that it is the update timing of the frame for updating the effect image and the notification image to be displayed on the image display devices 16 and 18 (drawing the new effect image and the notification image). It is determined whether or not there is a flag, and if there is no frame switching flag (step S837; No), the process is transferred to step S833, and if there is a frame switching flag (step S837; Yes), the step In S838, the frame switching flag is cleared.

In step S839, the control CPU 141 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and outputs the generated display list to the VDP 200. Here, the display list is image molding information for molding the effect image and the broadcast image to be displayed on the image display devices 16 and 18, and is generated for each frame of one unit or a plurality of units (frame update timing). In this embodiment, a display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, by setting drawing control commands according to the contents of the animation scene information (address) for each animation pattern updated by the animation control processing described later, one frame corresponding to the current number of frames can be set. Display list is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the order may be reversed.

In step S840, in step T11, the display control CPU 140a performs a drawing command process for instructing the VDP 200 to draw an effect image based on the display list output in step S839. By performing this drawing command processing, the VDP 200 generates image data in which an effect image or a broadcast image based on the display list is superimposed, draws it in the drawing frame buffer, and draws it in the display frame buffer. A process of displaying an image on the image display devices 16 and 18 is performed.

In step S841, the centralized CPU 141 generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and outputs the generated sound list to the voice control circuit 300. Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effect, error notification sound, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and outputs a new sound. Is generated with reference to the drawing frame.

In step S842, the control CPU 141 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control circuit 300 to output a sound based on the sound list output in step S841. By performing this sound output command processing, the sound control circuit 300 causes the sound output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the VDP 200, and the audio output device 9 is synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing. Output from is finished. The output of various sounds may be stopped from the audio output device 9 so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the update timing of the frame.

In step S843, the general CPU 141 performs an animation control process for updating the animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs the process in step S833. After that, the processes from step S834 to step S843 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the image control unit)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process by the image control unit 140, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m.
In step S850, the control CPU 141 performs a command reception process for receiving an effect instruction command or the like transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m in the receive buffer of the control RAM 142 is performed. When this process is completed, the command reception interrupt process this time is completed.

(V blank interrupt processing of image control unit)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V-blank interrupt process by the image control unit 140, and the V-blank interrupt process is performed every time (1/30 second = about 33 ms) when the display of the production image for one frame is completed from the VDP 200. It is executed every time the V blank signal transmitted to is received.

In step S860, the control CPU 141 performs counter update processing for updating a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”), and in step S861, the VDP 200 is subjected to counter update processing. The frame buffer switching command process for instructing the switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 146 is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer". It will switch alternately to and.

In step S862, the control CPU 141 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since the frame switching flag is referred to in step T8, the processes of steps S838 to S843 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Anime pattern setting process of image control unit)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process by the image control unit 140.
In step S870, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a customer waiting effect command, and if it is not a customer waiting effect command (step S870; No), the process is transferred to step S872, and the customer In the case of the waiting effect command (step S870; Yes), in step S871, the animation pattern of the customer waiting effect is determined from the customer waiting effect group for displaying the animation for the customer waiting effect, and the predetermined RAM 142 is determined. Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of the customer waiting effect to be set (set) in the area of.

In step S872, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an icon display command, and if it is not an icon display command (step S872; No), the process is transferred to step S874 and the icon is displayed. In the case of a display command (step S872; Yes), in step S873, the animation pattern of the icon is determined from the group of icons for displaying the animation of the hold icon and the animation of the variable icon, and the predetermined RAM 142 is determined. Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of the icon to be set (set) in the area of.

In step S874, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a variable effect pattern command, and if it is not a variable effect pattern command (step S874; No), the process is transferred to step S876 to change. In the case of the effect pattern command (step S874; Yes), in step S875, the animation pattern of the variation effect is determined from the variation effect group for displaying the background animation and the character animation, and the predetermined RAM 142 is determined. Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of the variable effect to be set (set) in the area.

In step S876, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a symbol pattern command, and if it is not a symbol pattern command (step S876; No), the process is transferred to step S878, and the symbol pattern command is executed. In the case of (step S876; Yes), in step S877, the animation pattern of the symbol is determined from the group of the effect symbols for displaying the animation of the effect symbol and the animation of the special symbol (fourth symbol), and the integrated RAM 142. Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of the pattern to be set (set) in the predetermined area of.

In step S878, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation effect command, and if it is not an operation effect command (step S878; No), the process is transferred to step S880 and the operation is performed. In the case of an effect command (step S878; Yes), in step S879, an animation pattern of the operation effect is determined from the operation effect group for displaying the operation effect, and the animation pattern of the operation effect is set in a predetermined area of the integrated RAM 142 (set). ) Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of the operation effect.

In step S880, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an opening effect command, and if it is not an opening effect command (step S880; No), the process is transferred to step S882, and the opening is performed. In the case of a production command (step S881; Yes), in step S881, the animation pattern of the opening effect is determined from the group of the opening effect for displaying the opening effect, and the animation pattern of the opening effect is set in a predetermined area of the integrated RAM 142c (set). ) Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of the opening effect.

In step S882, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a round effect command, and if it is not a round effect command (step S882; No), the process is transferred to step S884 to perform a round. In the case of a production command (step S882; Yes), in step S883, the animation pattern of the round production is determined from the group of the round production for displaying the round production, and the animation pattern of the round production is set in a predetermined area of the integrated RAM 142 (set). ) Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of the round production.

In step S884, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an ending effect command, and if it is not an ending effect command (step S884; No), the process is transferred to step S886 and the ending is performed. In the case of a production command (step S884; Yes), in step S885, an animation pattern of the ending effect is determined from the ending effect group for displaying the ending effect, and the animation pattern of the ending effect is set in a predetermined area of the integrated RAM 142 (set). ) Performs the process of determining the animation pattern of the ending effect.

In step S886, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a power-on effect command, and if it is not a power-on effect command (step S886; No), the process is transferred to step S888. , In the case of a power-on effect command (step S886; Yes), in step S887, the animation pattern of the power-on effect is determined from the power-on effect group for displaying the power-on effect, and the control RAM 142 is determined. Performs power-on animation pattern setting processing to be set (set) in the area of.

In step S888, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a command for power recovery effect, and if it is not a command for power recovery effect (step S888; No), the process is transferred to step S890. , In the case of the command of the power restoration effect (step S888; Yes), in step S889, the animation pattern of the power-on effect is determined from the group of the power restoration effect for displaying the power restoration effect, and the predetermined RAM 142 is determined. Performs the setting process of the animation pattern of power recovery to be set (set) in the area of.

In step 890, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an error effect command, and if it is not an error effect command (step S890; No), the current animation pattern setting process is performed. When the command is finished and the error effect is commanded (step S890; Yes), in step S891, the error effect animation pattern is determined from the error effect group for displaying the error effect, and a predetermined error effect animation pattern is determined in the integrated RAM 142. Performs the setting process of the error effect animation pattern to be set (set) in the area, and ends the setting process of the current animation pattern.

(Schematic diagram of image drawing by VDP)
A schematic diagram of image drawing by the VDP 200 (drawing control unit) will be described with reference to FIG. 51.
The VDP 200 reads various images from the CGROM 144 based on the image molding information of the display list output from the control CPU 141, performs arithmetic processing such as transparency (transparency) and display color on the read various images, and VRAM 146 according to a predetermined priority. The display image data drawn by superimposing one image data or a plurality of image data by writing to the drawing frame buffer (first frame buffer or second frame buffer) is displayed on the image display device 16.

The image having the first priority (first layer L1) includes an information image (version information image "○○ version ○○", power-on information image "RAM clear preparation ○○", and power recovery information image "○○". "Power is being restored" etc.) is set.
A specific image (base image, color bar image (startup image)) is set for the image having the second priority (second layer L2).
A progress guide image (holding number display image, special symbol image, etc.) is set in the image having the third priority (third layer L3).
An effect image (effect symbol image, notice effect image, hold icon image, variable icon image, etc.) is set in the image having the fourth priority (fourth layer L4).
A background image (normal mode background image, probability variation mode background image, time saving mode background image, reach effect moving image, etc.) is set for the image having the fifth priority (fifth layer L5).

In each layer L1 to L5, a plurality of image data are grouped, and when a plurality of image data are superimposed and drawn on the same layer, they are displayed according to the priority determined in the layer.
For example, when the effect symbol image, the notice effect image, the hold icon image, and the image data of the variable icon image are superimposed and drawn on the fourth layer L4, for example, the notice effect 1 image is the effect symbol image, the hold icon image. When the priority of the layer is set higher than that of the variable icon image, the preview effect 1 image is displayed on the layer higher than the effect symbol image, the hold icon image, and the variable icon image. Further, for example, when the notice effect 2 image is set to have a lower priority of the layer than the hold icon image and the change icon image, the notice effect 2 image is the effect symbol image, the hold icon image, and the change icon image. The image is also displayed in the lower layer.

Then, the first frame buffer area 146c and the second frame buffer area 146d are alternately switched between the drawing frame buffer and the display frame buffer according to the frame switching instruction from the control CPU 141, and the image written in the display frame buffer. Data is read out, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated from the read image data, and various images are displayed on the first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 18 (sub liquid crystal). It is designed to let you.

Here, various images will be described.
The "version information image" is an image for suggesting or notifying the version information of the data stored in various ROMs, and the display target period is until the effect control unit 130m receives a command after the power is turned on.
The "power-on information image" is an image for suggesting or notifying that the power has been turned on with RAM clear, and the display target period is until the effect control unit 130 m receives the power-on designation command. There is.
The "power restoration information image" is an image for suggesting or notifying that the power restoration has been performed without clearing the RAM, and is 30 seconds after the effect control unit 130m receives the power restoration designation command after the power is turned on. The display target period is until the elapse of time or until a predetermined command (variation pattern designation command, opening designation command, interval designation command, round designation command, etc.) is received.

The "notice effect image" and the "character image" are images that suggest or notify in the form of a notice the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display (variable effect) being executed or the variable display (variable effect) to be executed will be a big hit. Therefore, the display target period is during the execution of the variable effect for producing the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the jackpot effect, and the like.
The "base image" is an image that is the background of the power-on information image and the power-recovery information image, and the period during which the power-on information image and the power-recovery information image are displayed is the display target period. The power-restoring image and the base image constitute the power-restoring image.
A power-restoring image composed of a base image and a power-on information image may be set on the first layer. In this case, it is possible to omit the step of setting the base image on the second layer.

The "color bar image" is a start image for confirming the display state of the image display devices 16 and 18 as well as the background of the version information image, and the period during which the version information image is displayed is the display target period. ing.

The "hold icon image (hold storage image)" is an image that notifies the number of special figure determination information (hold storage) stored in the special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 110c and gives an effect. Basically, the display target period is the period during which the special symbol determination information is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area.
The "variable icon image (variable storage image)" is an image corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is basically a special symbol determination in the special symbol storage area. Although it is the display target period in which the information is stored, a predetermined period from the start of the variation effect may be the display target period.
The "holding number display image" is an image for suggesting or notifying the number of special figure determination information (holding storage) stored in the special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is basically an initial image and variation. The display target period is the customer waiting state (excluding the customer waiting demo production being executed) while the production is being executed.

The hold icon image displays the number of holds, and since it is a display with further effect, it changes to any of a plurality of display modes in which the jackpot expectation is different, and suggests the jackpot expectation. Since the hold number display image is an image containing only numbers, the hold number is displayed.
Further, the hold icon image may be hidden according to the progress of the effect during the change, but the hold number display image continues to be displayed regardless of the progress of the effect during the change display (that is, the display mode is It does not change).

The "special symbol image" is an image composed of numbers, and by displaying the fluctuation in synchronization with the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol, the progress state of the fluctuation display and the result of the fluctuation display (variation effect) can be displayed. It is an image for suggesting or notifying, and basically, the display target period is the display of the image during power restoration, the execution of the fluctuation effect, the customer waiting state (excluding the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), etc. There is.
The "effect symbol image" is an image composed of numbers and characters that has a directing effect, and is finally displayed or temporarily stopped during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol. It is an image for suggesting or notifying the result of the fluctuation display (variation effect). Basically, the image is being restored while the power is being restored, the variation effect is being executed, and the customer waiting state (except when the customer waiting demo effect is being executed). ) Etc. are the display target period.

When the effect symbol image notifies that the special symbol is changing and the display mode is different for each type of effect mode because the display is provided with effectability, and the SP / SPSP reach effect is performed. The display mode changes such that the character is erased and displayed in a reduced size with only numbers.
Since the special symbol image is a display change in which the numbers "1" to "9" are switched in order, only the fact that the special symbol is changing is notified.

The "background image" is an image having a color rendering property that constitutes the background of the variable effect according to the effect mode (game state). The display target period is the customer waiting state (except during the customer waiting demo production).
Since the background image has a display mode with color rendering properties, the display mode differs depending on the type of effect mode, and the display mode differs depending on the type of reach effect.
For example, when entering a specific zone with a high expectation of big hit in the normal mode, the display mode changes to the display mode corresponding to the specific zone, and when the SP reach effect is started in the normal mode, the display mode changes to the display mode corresponding to the SP reach effect. do.

(Display example before and after power-on during variable display)
A display example before and after the power is turned on during the variable display of the special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 52.
FIG. 52A is a diagram showing a display example immediately before the power failure occurs. Here, it is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), the first holding number is "1", the second holding number is "0", and the first in various production devices. A variable effect is performed to produce a variable display of a special symbol.

At this time, the VDP 200 sets a special symbol image (TZ) and a hold number display image (16e "1", 16f "0") in the third layer L3, and sets the effect symbol image for the normal gaming state in the fourth layer L4. (16a "2 (dog) ↓ 6 (tiger)"), the variable icon image (16b "◎") and the hold icon image (16b "○") are set, and the normal background image (sub-background) is set on the fifth layer L5. (Including an image) is set, and the display image data (variation effect image) drawn by superimposing these image data is displayed on the image display device 16. The voice control circuit 130 outputs the variation effect BGM from the voice output device 9.

FIG. 52B is a diagram showing a display example when a power off (power supply: OFF) occurs. Here, since the power supply to the image display device 16 is also stopped, the image is not displayed on the image display device 16 and the effect sound is not output from the sound output device 9.

FIG. 52 (c) is a diagram showing a display example immediately after the power is turned on (power restoration) with the RAM clear switch 58c turned on.
At this time, the VDP 200 sets a version information image on the first layer L1, sets a color bar image on the second layer L2 as the initial operation of the image display device 16, and superimposes and draws the display image. The data is displayed on the image display device 16.
After displaying the color bar image, an initializing image (character image of "RAM clearing") may be displayed to notify that the RAM is being cleared until the RAM clearing is completed. In addition, when the initializing image is displayed, the audio output device 9 emits a notification sound indicating that the RAM area is being initialized (“RAM clearing” sound + “beep” warning sound). The output is output, and the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are all lit in red.

FIG. 52 (d) shows a power-on effect when the effect control unit 130 m receives a power-on designation command and a low-accuracy non-time-saving game state specification command continuously (substantially simultaneously) transmitted from the main control board 110. It is a figure which shows the display example which starts. In this case, the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) are set, and information related to the variation display of the special symbol (variation time and number of holds). Etc.) is reset to the initial value.

The VDP200 sets an initial special symbol image (TZ “123”) and a hold number display image (16e “0”, 16f “0”) on the third layer L3, and sets an initial effect symbol for RAM clear on the fourth layer L4. Display image data (initial image) drawn by setting an image (16a "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)"), setting a normal background image on the fifth layer L5, and superimposing these image data. ) Is displayed on the image display device 16. The voice control circuit 130 outputs a RAM clear notification sound (“RAM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) from the voice output device 9 over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Further, the lamp control unit 150 turns on the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

In this way, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the color bar image continues to be displayed from the time the power is turned on until the RAM clear is completed, and the initial image is displayed when the RAM clear is completed. At the same time, the RAM clear notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the frame lighting device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are lit in red, so that it is possible to notify that the power has been turned on.
In addition, the display target period of the color bar image does not overlap with the display target period of the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the hold icon image, the variable icon image, the effect symbol image, and the effect display image of the background image. The display image data drawn by superimposing the color bar image and the effect display image during the display target period of the color bar image is not displayed on the image display device 16. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 200 during the display target period of the color bar image.

(Display example before and after power restoration during variable display of special symbol)
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a display example before and after power restoration during the variable display of the special symbol will be described.
FIG. 53A is a diagram showing a display example immediately before the power failure occurs. Here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, and various production devices (image display device 16, In the voice output device 9, the lighting device 23, 27, etc.), a variation effect is performed to produce a variation display of the first special symbol based on the determination result of loss.

At this time, the VDP 200 sets a special symbol image (TZ) and a hold number display image (16e "3", 16f "0") on the third layer L3, and a production symbol image for a normal gaming state on the fourth layer L4. (16a "2 ↓ 6"), the variable icon image (16d "◎") and the first hold icon image (16b3 "○") are set, and a normal background image is set in the fifth layer L5, and these are set. The display image data drawn by superimposing the image data of the above is displayed on the image display device 16. The voice control circuit 130 outputs the variation effect BGM from the voice output device 9.

FIG. 53B is a diagram showing a display example when a power off (power supply: OFF) occurs. Here, since the power supply to the image display device 16 is also stopped, the image is not displayed on the image display device 16, the effect sound is not output from the sound output device 9, and the frame lighting. The device 27 and the panel lighting device 23 are not lit.

FIG. 53 (c) is a diagram showing a display example immediately after the power is turned on (power is turned on) with the RAM clear switch 58c turned off.
At this time, in the VDP 200, a version information image is set in the first layer L1, a color bar image is set in the second layer L2, and the display image data drawn by superimposing these image data is transmitted to the image display device 16. indicate.

FIG. 53 (d) is a diagram showing a display example in which the power restoration effect is started when the effect control unit 130m receives various commands continuously (substantially simultaneously) transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power is restored. Is.
The effect control unit 130m receives various commands from the main control board 110, such as a power restoration designation command for low accuracy and non-time saving, a first special symbol memory 3 designation command, a second special symbol memory 0 designation command, and a normal symbol memory designation 1 command. Is continuously received.

Assuming that the control state of the game before the power outage occurred was the normal game state, the effect control unit 130m sets the data indicating the normal game state in the game state storage area, and sets the special figure hold number storage counter to the first Set "3" as the hold number, "0" as the second hold number, and set "4" in the normal figure hold number counter.

The VDP200 sets a power recovery information image in the first layer L1, sets a base image in the second layer L2, and sets an initial special symbol image (TZ “345”) and a hold number display image (16e) in the third layer L3. “0”, 16f “0”) is set, and the initial effect design image (“3 (rabbit) 4 (chicken) 5 (coala)”) for power restoration and the variable icon image (“◎”) are set on the fourth layer L4. ”) And the first hold icon image (three“ ○ ”) are set, a normal background image is set on the fifth layer L5, and the display image data drawn by superimposing these image data is displayed on the image display device 16. Display on. The voice control circuit 130 outputs a power restoration notification sound (“pee, beep”) from the voice output device 9.
At this point, the display state of the first game information display device 19 has been restored to the state before the power failure occurred.
Since the initial effect symbol image for power restoration is set as the effect symbol image, the effect image that was displayed when the power was turned off is not displayed, so that the power was cut off after the power was restored. The image is not displayed from the display state of the effect pattern that was sometimes performed.

After the power is restored, the power restoration information image and the base image are displayed in a layer higher than the initial special symbol image, the hold number display image, the initial effect symbol image, the variable icon image, the first hold icon image, and the normal background image. Since the base image is displayed on the entire screen, the images displayed on each layer that are actually visibly displayed are the power recovery information image and the base image, the initial special symbol image, and the number of holds. Since the display image, the initial effect symbol image, the variable icon image, the first hold icon image, and the normal background image are invisible, they are not actually displayed.

In FIG. 53 (e), the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol memory 4 designation command transmitted from the main control board or 110 when the game ball newly wins the first starting port 10, but the power supply It is a figure which shows the display example which continues the restoration effect. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets "4" as the first hold number in the special figure hold number counter.

The VDP200 sets a power recovery information image in the first layer L1, sets a base image in the second layer L2, and sets an initial special symbol image (TZ “345”) and a hold number display image (16e) in the third layer L3. “4”, 16f “0”) are set, and the initial effect design image (“3 (rabbit) 4 (chicken) 5 (coala)”) for power restoration and the variable icon image (“◎”) are set on the fourth layer L4. ”) And the first hold icon image (four“ ○ ”) are set, a normal background image is set on the fifth layer L5, and the display image data drawn by superimposing these image data is displayed on the image display device 16. Display on. The voice control circuit 130 outputs a power restoration notification sound (“pee, beep”) from the voice output device 9.

Even in this case, the power recovery information image and the base image are displayed in a higher layer than the initial special symbol image, the hold number display image, the initial effect symbol image, the first hold icon image, and the normal background image, and the base image is all. Since it is displayed on the screen, among the images displayed on each layer, the power recovery information image and the base image are actually displayed, and the initial special symbol image, the hold number display image, and the initial effect are displayed. Since the symbol image, the variable icon image, the first hold icon image, and the normal background image are invisible, they are not actually displayed. Therefore, it is not displayed that the hold number display image has been changed to "4".

In FIG. 53 (f), the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol loss confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 due to the stop display of the lost special symbol in the variation display of the first special symbol. , It is a figure which shows the display example in which the power restoration effect is continued.

The VDP200 sets a power recovery information image in the first layer L1, sets a base image in the second layer L2, and sets an initial special symbol image (TZ “345”) and a hold number display image (16e “16e” in the third layer L3). 4 ”, 16f“ 0 ”) are set, and the initial effect design image (“3 (rabbit) 4 (chicken) 5 (coala)”) for power restoration and the first hold icon image (4 pieces) are set on the 4th layer L4. "○") is set, a normal background image is set in the fifth layer L5, and the display image data drawn by superimposing these image data is displayed on the image display device 16. The voice control circuit 130 outputs a power restoration notification sound (“pee, beep”) from the voice output device 9.

Even in this case, the power recovery information image and the base image are displayed in a higher layer than the initial special symbol image, the hold number display image, the initial effect symbol image, the first hold icon image, and the normal background image, and the base image is all. Since it is displayed on the screen, among the images displayed on each layer, the power recovery information image and the base image are actually displayed, and the initial special symbol image, the hold number display image, and the initial Since the effect design image, the first hold icon image, and the normal background image are invisible, they are not actually displayed. Therefore, the player cannot recognize that the variable icon image is deleted and not displayed.
Since the variable icon image is not actually displayed as described above when the power restoration effect is being performed, the variable icon image may not be drawn in FIGS. 52 (d) to 52 (e). good.

FIG. 53 (g) shows a power restoration effect when the effect control unit 130 m receives various commands continuously (substantially simultaneously) transmitted from the main control board 110 at the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example which ends and switches to an initial screen.
As various commands, the effect control unit 130 m includes a power restoration designation command for low accuracy and non-time saving, an effect symbol designation command, a first special symbol variation pattern designation command, a first special symbol memory 3 designation command, and a normal command. Design memory specification 1 Receives commands continuously.

In the VDP200, an initial special symbol image (TZ “345”) and a hold number display image (16e “4”, 16f “0”) are set in the third layer L3, and an initial effect symbol for power restoration is set in the fourth layer L4. An image ("3 (rabbit) 4 (chicken) 5 (coara)"), the variable icon image ("◎") and the first hold icon image (three "○") are set, and the fifth layer L5 is set. A normal background image is set, and the display image data (initial image) drawn by superimposing these image data is displayed on the image display device 16. The voice control circuit 130 outputs the variation effect BGM from the voice output device 9.

In this case, since the image data of the power restoration information image and the base image are not drawn, the image actually displayed is switched from the image during power restoration to the initial image. Then, since the initial special symbol image, the hold number display image, the initial effect symbol image, the variable icon image, and the first hold icon image are displayed on a higher layer than the background image displayed on the full screen, these images are displayed. All of them will be displayed visibly.

FIG. 53 (h) is a diagram showing a display example in which the variation effect for producing the variation display of the first special symbol is started.
The VDP200 has a special symbol image (TZ "↓↓↓") and a hold number display image (16e "3", 16f "0") in which the numbers "1" to "9" are sequentially switched to the third layer L3. Is set, and the three effect symbols 16a are scrolled downward from the stopped state on the fourth layer L4 (↓↓↓) ”), the variable icon image (“◎”), and the first hold icon image ( Three "○") are set, a normal background image is set on the fifth layer L5, and the display image data (effect display image of variable effect) drawn by superimposing these image data is displayed on the image display device 16. indicate. The voice control circuit 130 continuously outputs the variation effect BGM from the voice output device 9.
In the image display device 16, the initial image of FIG. 53 (g) is displayed for a moment and immediately switched to the effect display image of the variation effect of FIG. 53 (h).

In this way, when the power is turned on after the power is cut off during the variable display (variable effect) that causes a loss, a color bar image (startup image) is displayed and the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c. Since the power restoration effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or until the next fluctuation display is started) immediately after the power is turned on (reception of the power restoration designation command), the power restoration is performed. It becomes possible to notify that.

In addition, in the period in which the display target period of the image during power restoration overlaps with the display target period of the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the variable icon image, the hold icon image, the effect symbol image, and the effect display image of the background image. Is drawn by superimposing the image data of the image during power restoration and the image data of the effect display image, but since the image during power restoration is displayed on a higher layer than the effect display image, the power is being restored by the effect display image. The player can recognize that the power is restored without disturbing the visual recognition of the image.

On the other hand, when the image during power restoration is displayed, the effect display image displayed on the lower layer than the image during power restoration is invisible and is not actually displayed, so the power is turned off during power restoration. The effect display image corresponding to the variable effect that is lost when the above occurs is not displayed.

Then, after the display target period (power restoration effect) of the image during power restoration is completed, the effect display image becomes visible to the player, so that the player recognizes that the power restoration process is completed and the game is restarted. It becomes possible to do. This effect display image is not an effect display image corresponding to the variable effect executed when the power is cut off, but an effect display image corresponding to the newly executed variable effect.

The initial production design image for clearing the RAM ("1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)") and the initial production design image for power restoration ("3 (rabbit) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)") ") May be a common production design image ("1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)").

When the power is restored and the effect control board 130 is activated after the power is cut off, a color bar image is displayed as a power restoration preparation image (start-up image) as described above. Then, for some reason (generation of noise, lack of command wiring (connector) half-insertion or derailment between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130), the effect control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command from the main control board 110. If the image control unit 140 cannot receive the power recovery designation command from the effect control board 130 and receives a command other than the power recovery designation command, it draws according to the reception of the power recovery designation command. Display image data different from the displayed display image data is drawn.

(Image display control when other commands are received without receiving the power recovery specification command from the main control board after power recovery)
Using FIGS. 54 to 62, image display control when a power restoration designation command is normally received after power restoration and then another command is received, and other without normally receiving the power restoration designation command after power restoration. The image display control when the command of is received will be described.

FIG. 54 is actually displayed as an image drawn when the effect control board 130 normally receives the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 at the time of power recovery and then normally receives other commands (various commands). It is a figure which shows the image.
FIG. 55 is actually displayed as an image drawn when the effect control board 130 receives other commands (various commands) without normally receiving the power recovery designation command from the main control control board 110 at the time of power recovery. It is a figure which shows the image.

(Power recovery specification command)
For example, a low-probability non-time-saving game state is set, the first hold number is "3", the second hold number is "0", and the loss judgment result is based on the normal mode corresponding to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. A color bar image (power restoration) is used as the initial operation of the image display device 16 by starting the effect control board 130 when the power is restored when the power is cut off while the variation effect for producing the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed. When the preparation image (start-up image)) is displayed and the power restoration designation command is normally received from the main control board 110, the color bar image is switched to the image during power restoration.

Since the power recovery designation command indicates information about the game state (low-accuracy non-time-saving game state, low-accuracy non-time-saving game state, high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, high-accuracy time-short game state) before the power is cut off (here, low accuracy). Since it is possible to specify the type of effect mode (normal mode, time saving mode, or probabilistic mode) corresponding to the game state before the power outage occurs (normal mode is specified here), the power supply Restoration information image ("Power is being restored"), base image (black solid image), initial production design image corresponding to the production mode before the power is cut off (here, "3 (rabbit) 4" of the display mode corresponding to the normal mode (Chicken) 5 (Koala) ") and the image data of the background image (here, the background image for the normal mode) corresponding to the effect mode before the power failure occurs are drawn respectively.

The power restoration information image and the base image are displayed in a layer higher than the initial effect design image and the background image, and the base image is displayed on the entire screen. Therefore, what is actually visually displayed on the image display device 16 is It is a power restoration information image and a base image. The image composed of the power restoration information image and the base image is the image during power restoration.
As shown in FIG. 53, the initial effect symbol image and the background image cannot be visually recognized by the image display device 16, so that they are not actually displayed.

When the power is cut off during the above-mentioned fluctuation display of the special symbol and the image during power restoration is displayed after the power is restored, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit on the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b. Is performed and the variable display of the special symbol executed when the power is cut off is restarted, but the LED is not turned on and remains off on the special symbol second indicators 20a and 20b.

In the main control board 110, when a power failure occurs during the variation display of the special symbol, after the power is restored, the elapsed time of the variation display of the special symbol that was executed when the power failure occurs is stored (backed up). Therefore, it is possible to specify the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol after the power is restored.
Therefore, when the image during power restoration is displayed, the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b are restarted from the LED (light emitting unit) that was lit when the power was cut off, and the remaining fluctuation time. The LED (light emitting unit) is turned on until the end of, and the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off when the remaining fluctuation time ends.

In the effect control board 130, it is not possible to specify the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol that was executed when the power was cut off after the power was restored, and the power was cut off from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Information about the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that was being executed when it occurred is also not transmitted.
Therefore, when the image during power restoration is displayed, the LED (light emitting unit) remains off in the special symbol second indicators 20a and 20b.

(Special symbol memory specification command)
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, a normal mode corresponding to the low probability non-time saving game state is set, the first holding number is "3" and the second holding number is "0". A power failure occurs when a fluctuation effect is performed to produce a variation display of the first special symbol based on the determination result of loss, and after the power is restored, continuous transmission from the main control board 110 (substantially simultaneous transmission). When the power restoration specification command and the special symbol storage specification command are normally received, the color bar image is switched to the image during power restoration.

Since the special symbol storage designation command (here, the first special symbol storage 3 designation command) indicates the number of pending storages, the image data of the reserved number display image corresponding to the number of reserved storages (“3”) is drawn.
Furthermore, the type of effect mode (normal mode, time saving mode, or probability variation mode) corresponding to the game state before the power outage can be specified by the power recovery designation command (here, the power recovery designation command for low probability non-time saving). Therefore (here, the normal mode), the image data of the hold icon image and the variable icon image of the display mode corresponding to the effect mode (normal mode) before the power failure occurs according to the number of hold storages indicated by the special symbol memory designation command. Is drawn.

The power recovery information image and the base image drawn based on the reception of the power recovery designation command are displayed in a layer higher than the hold icon image and the variable icon image, and the base image is displayed on the entire screen, so that the image is displayed. What is actually visually displayed on the device 16 is a power restoration in progress image composed of a power restoration information image and a base image.
In the image display device 16, the hold number display image, the hold icon image, and the variable icon image become invisible, so that they are not actually displayed. That is, even if new image data is drawn by the received command, it is not always displayed visually.

In the special symbol hold 1st display 19d, since the number of hold storages before the occurrence of power failure is stored (backed up) on the main control board 110, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit according to the number of hold storages. Is performed, and in the special symbol holding second display 20d, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned on according to the number of holding storages indicated by the received special symbol storage designation command.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, when the special symbol memory designation command is first received without normally receiving the power recovery designation command after the power is restored, the special symbol memory designation command is a game before the power is cut off. Since the information about the state is not shown, the type of the effect mode corresponding to the game state before the power failure occurs cannot be specified.
Therefore, the background image, the hold number display image, the hold display icon image, and the variable icon image of the display mode corresponding to the effect mode before the power failure occurs cannot be drawn.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56, the color bar image drawn when the power is turned on in the image display device 16 remains displayed.
In the special symbol hold 1st display 19d, since the number of hold storages before the occurrence of power failure is stored in the main control board 110, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit according to the number of hold storages. In the special symbol hold second display 20d, the lighting display of the LED (light emitting unit) does not change regardless of the game state and the type of the effect mode. ) Is lit.

(Variation pattern specification command)
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, a normal mode corresponding to the low probability non-time saving game state is set, the first holding number is "3" and the second holding number is "0". A power failure occurs when a fluctuation effect is performed to produce a variation display of the first special symbol based on the determination result of loss, and after the power is restored, continuous transmission from the main control board 110 (substantially simultaneous transmission). The power restoration specification command and the special symbol memory specification command that have been executed are normally received, and the image during power restoration is displayed.

After that, in the state where the image during power restoration is displayed, the main control board is terminated by the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was executed when the power was cut off again after the power was restored by the first display 19a. The special symbol confirmation command sent from 110 is received, but the image is continuously displayed while the power is being restored. Then, a special symbol storage designation command (substantially simultaneously) transmitted from the main control board 110 at the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the oldest hold stored when the power is cut off (substantially simultaneously). Here, a special symbol memory 2 designation command), a game state designation command (here, a low-accuracy non-time saving game state designation command), a production symbol designation command (here, a first special symbol loss designation production symbol designation command), and a variation pattern designation. When a command (here, a variation pattern specification command indicating that the loss variation pattern 01 for the non-time saving game state) is normally received, the image during power restoration is switched to the initial image.

When the special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, effect symbol specification command, and variation pattern specification command are received, the display of the image during power recovery ends, and the game state specification command (here, the low-accuracy non-time saving power supply specification command) is used. Based on the effect mode (here, normal mode) according to the specified game state (here, low probability non-time saving game state), the initial effect symbol image (here, "3 (rabbit)" of the display mode corresponding to the normal mode). 4 (chicken) 5 (coala) ”), the initial special symbol image (“345 ”), and the background image (here, the background image in the normal mode) are superimposed, and the display image data of the initial image is drawn. NS.
In addition, the image data of the variable icon image and the hold icon image in the display mode corresponding to the effect mode (normal mode) specified by receiving the special symbol memory designation command is also drawn and displayed.

Since the image data of the power supply information image and the base image set in the first and second layers is deleted when the display of the image during power restoration is completed, the initial effect symbol constituting the initial image in the image display device 16 is deleted. The image, the initial special symbol image and the background image are displayed so as to be visible.
As described above, when the variation pattern specification command is received, one variation effect pattern (here, the variation effect pattern 01 for loss) is determined from a plurality of types of variation effect patterns based on the received variation pattern specification command. , The initial image is displayed only for a moment, and the effect display image (see FIG. 52 (h)) of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined immediately is displayed.

Note that, for example, when a low-probability non-time-saving game state is set, the first hold number is "0" and the second hold number is "0" (that is, when the special symbol variation display is not performed), the power supply is supplied. When a power failure occurs and the power recovery specification command is normally received after the power is restored, the image during power restoration is displayed, and when the image during power restoration is displayed, the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 10. The first start port winning designation command and the first special symbol storage 1 designation command are transmitted from the control board 110. At this point, the image during power restoration remains displayed.

Then, the special symbol memory designation command (here, the special symbol memory 0 command) continuously transmitted (substantially simultaneously transmitted) from the main control board 110 at the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol memory 1. , Game state specification command (here, low-probability non-time saving game state specification command), effect symbol specification command (here, 1st special symbol loss designation effect symbol specification command), and variable pattern specification command (here, for non-time saving game state) When the fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating that the loss fluctuation pattern 01 is normally received, the image during power restoration is switched to the initial image.

When the special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, effect symbol specification command, and variation pattern specification command are received, the display of the image during power recovery ends, and the game state specification command (here, the low-accuracy non-time saving power supply specification command) is used. Based on the effect mode (here, normal mode) according to the specified game state (here, low probability non-time saving game state), the initial effect symbol image (here, "3 (rabbit)" of the display mode corresponding to the normal mode). 4 (chicken) 5 (coala) ”), the initial special symbol image (“345 ”), and the background image (here, the background image in the normal mode) are superimposed, and the display image data of the initial image is drawn. NS.
In addition, the variable icon image of the display mode corresponding to the effect mode (normal mode) specified by receiving the special symbol memory designation command is also drawn and displayed.

Since the image data of the power supply information image and the base image set in the first and second layers is deleted when the display of the image during power restoration is completed, the initial effect symbol constituting the initial image in the image display device 16 is deleted. The image, the initial special symbol image and the background image are displayed so as to be visible.
As described above, when the variation pattern specification command is received, one variation effect pattern (here, the variation effect pattern 01 for loss) is determined from a plurality of types of variation effect patterns based on the received variation pattern specification command. , The initial image is displayed only for a moment, and the effect display image of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined immediately is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, after the power is restored, the variation pattern is specified without normally receiving the power restoration specification command and without receiving the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command. When only the command (here, the variation pattern specification command indicating that the loss variation pattern 01 for the non-time saving game state) is received for the first time, the variation pattern specification command itself does not indicate the information regarding the game state, It is possible to specify the type of effect mode based on the variation effect pattern (loss variation effect pattern 01 for normal mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (loss variation pattern 01 for non-time saving game state) indicated by the variation pattern specification command. Since it can be done (here, it can be specified that it is the normal mode), each of the initial effect symbol image, the initial special symbol image, and the background image constituting the initial image of the display mode corresponding to the specified effect mode (normal mode). Image data is drawn.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57, the image display device 16 switches from the color bar image to the initial image for a moment and immediately switches to the effect display image of the variation effect.

(Special symbol confirmation command)
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, a normal mode corresponding to the low probability non-time saving game state is set, the first holding number is "3" and the second holding number is "0". When a fluctuation effect is being performed to produce a variation display of the first special symbol based on the judgment result of loss, a power failure occurs, and after the power is restored, the power restoration designation command is normally received from the main control board 110. When the image during power restoration is displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 110 due to the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that was executed when the power was cut off again on the special symbol first display 19a after the power was restored. When the special symbol confirmation command (here, the first special symbol confirmation command) is normally received, the special symbol confirmation command only indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, so that the image data is not drawn. Therefore, in the image display device 16, the image during power restoration drawn after the power restoration is still displayed.

In the main control board 110, when a power failure occurs during the variation display of the first special symbol of loss, the type and execution of the variation pattern of the first special symbol that was executed when the power failure occurred. Since the elapsed time of the fluctuation display is stored, after the power is restored, the special symbol 1st display 19a resumes lighting from the LED that was lit when the power was cut off, and when the remaining fluctuation time ends. Only one LED indicating that it is lost is lit, and it is notified that the variation display of the special symbol has stopped (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, when the special symbol confirmation command (here, the first special symbol confirmation command) is first received without normally receiving the power restoration designation command after the power is restored, the special symbol is confirmed. Since the command does not show information about the game state before the power outage and information about hit / loss, it is not possible to specify the type of production mode corresponding to the game state before the power outage and the number of reserved storages before the power outage. It is not possible to draw image data of each of the background image, the hold icon image, the variable icon image, the effect symbol image, and the hold number display image of the display mode corresponding to the effect mode before the power failure occurs.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, the color bar image drawn when the power is turned on in the image display device 16 remains displayed.

In addition, in the main control board 110, if a power failure occurs during the variation display of the special symbol of loss, the elapsed time of the variation display of the special symbol that was executed when the power disconnection occurs after the power is restored is stored. Therefore, it is possible to specify the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol after the power is restored.
Therefore, in the special symbol first indicators 19a and 19b, as described above, one LED indicating that the LED that was lit when the power was cut off resumes lighting and that the LED is lost when the remaining fluctuation time ends. Only lights up (see FIG. 45).

In this way, after the power is restored, when only the variation pattern specification command is first received without receiving the power restoration specification command and the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command. Since the type of the effect mode corresponding to the game state before the power failure occurs can be specified by the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, the initial effect symbol image of the display mode corresponding to the specified effect mode, Since the initial special pattern and the background image can be drawn, the color bar image is switched to the initial image.
On the other hand, after the power is restored, if the special symbol storage specification command is received without receiving the power restoration specification command, or if the special symbol confirmation command is received, these commands provide information on the game state before the power is cut off. Since it is not shown, the color bar image remains displayed because the image data cannot be drawn because the type of the effect mode corresponding to the game state before the power off occurs cannot be specified.

(Opening specification command)
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, a normal mode corresponding to the low probability non-time saving game state is set, the first holding number is "2" and the second holding number is "0". In, a variation effect is performed to produce a variation display of the first special symbol based on the judgment result of the jackpot, and a combination display mode in which the three effect symbols 16a indicate the jackpot (for example, "2 (dog) 2 (dog) 2 (dog)" ”) When the power is cut off when the confirmation stop is displayed, and after the power is restored, if the power restoration specification command is normally received, the image during power restoration is displayed and the image during power restoration is displayed. When the low-accuracy non-time-saving game state designation command and opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 are received at the start of the jackpot game after the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) ends, the power is being restored from the image. Switch to the opening production image.

In the opening effect image, an effect image (character image, moving image by character, etc.) suggesting the type of jackpot (normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot) and an opening background image are displayed.
When displaying the opening effect image, it corresponds to the jackpot start effect pattern determined based on the jackpot type indicated by the opening specification command from among the multiple types of jackpot start effect patterns set for each jackpot type. The image data of the effect image and the background image is drawn.

In addition to the opening effect image, a right-handed promotion image (right-handed characters and a right arrow) and a big hit special symbol image indicating that the hit is a big hit are displayed.
The image data of the jackpot special symbol image is drawn based on the jackpot type indicated by the opening designation command, and right-handed promotion is promoted based on the right-handed instruction information included in the low-accuracy non-time saving game state designation command received at the start of the jackpot. The image data of the image (right-handed characters and right arrow) is drawn.

Specifically, when the opening designation command for normal jackpot shows that it is a 4R normal jackpot, the character image of "BONUS" and the rainbow-colored effect image suggesting that it is a normal jackpot are displayed on the entire screen background. The image data of the image is drawn.
In addition, the image data of the normal jackpot special symbol image of "222" is drawn by indicating that the 4R normal jackpot is performed by the opening designation command for the normal jackpot, and the right-handed information of the low-probability non-time-saving game state designation command " Right-handed → ”image data is drawn.

In the image display device 16, when the display of the image during power restoration is completed, the image data of the power supply information image and the base image set in the first and second layers are erased. The promotion image and the jackpot special symbol image are displayed visually.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, when the opening designation command is first received without receiving the power recovery designation command after the power recovery, the jackpot determined based on the jackpot type indicated by the opening designation command The image data of the effect image and the background image corresponding to the start effect pattern are drawn.
In addition, the image data of the jackpot special symbol image is drawn based on the jackpot type indicated by the opening designation command. Since the low-probability non-time saving game state specification command including the right-handed information is not received, the image data of the right-handed promotion image is not drawn, so that the right-handed promotion image is not displayed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the image display device 16 switches from the color bar image to the display of the opening effect image and the jackpot special symbol image.

In this way, after the power is restored, when the opening specification command is normally received at the start of the jackpot game after receiving the power restoration specification command, or when the opening specification command is first received without receiving the power restoration specification command. In either case, the effect image corresponding to the jackpot start effect pattern determined based on the type of jackpot indicated by the opening designation command and the opening effect image in which the image data of the background image is drawn are displayed.

In addition, when the opening designation command is received and the opening effect image is displayed for a preset time, for some reason (noise is generated, between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) when the first round game is started. If the round designation command for the first opening is not received (cannot be done) due to the command wiring (connection connector) being half-inserted or missing such as derailment), the opening effect image remains displayed. In this case, the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 13a is started.

In the above explanation, the image display control after the power supply is restored due to the power failure occurring when the variable display of the special symbol that is a big hit is performed has been described. If a power failure occurs while the system is being executed or in a customer waiting state and the opening specification command is first received without receiving the power restoration specification command after the power is restored, the main control board 110 is powered off. Since the game state at that time is stored, even if the opening effect image is displayed on the image display device 16, the big winning opening 13a is not opened if the game state is not a big hit when the power is cut off.

(Round specification command)
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, an opening effect image or right-handed hit based on a low-probability non-time saving game state designation command and a normal jackpot opening designation command received when the opening game in the 4R normal jackpot game is started. When the power is cut off when the promotion image etc. is displayed and the power recovery specification command is normally received after the power is restored, the power restoration image is displayed and the power restoration image is displayed. When the first open round designation command is received, a predetermined power restoration round effect image (predetermined round effect image) and a number of rounds suggestion image ("ROUND1") corresponding to the first open round designation command are received. ) And the right-handed promotion image (right-handed characters and right arrow) are displayed.

The round designation command shows information on the number of rounds to start the round game, but does not show information on the type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot), so just receiving the round designation command is a jackpot. It is not possible to draw the image data of the round effect image corresponding to the type.
However, since it is possible to identify that the game was in a big hit game state when the power was cut off by the power restoration specification command received before the round specification command, the image data of the predetermined round effect image for power restoration is drawn. Is displayed.
Further, since it is possible to identify the jackpot game state when the power is cut off by receiving the power recovery designation command, the image data of the right-handed promotion image is drawn.
In the image display device 16, a round effect image for power restoration, a round number suggestion image, and a right-handed promotion image are visually displayed.

The above-mentioned round effect image for power restoration is an effect image having a display mode different from the round effect image corresponding to the type of jackpot.
Specifically, in the round effect image corresponding to the type of jackpot, a moving image having a story with a character related to a predetermined motif is displayed, and in the round effect image for power restoration, a specific character image is displayed.
The power restoration round effect image may be a specific round effect image among a plurality of round effect images corresponding to the type of jackpot. For example, the round effect image displayed during the first round game in the normal jackpot game is displayed as the power recovery round effect image.

In addition, during the multiple round games (2R, 3R, or 4R) of the 4R normal jackpot game (during the 2R round game), the power is cut off and the power recovery designation command is received after the power is restored. Then, the image during power restoration is displayed, and when the round designation command for the multiple opening times (the round designation command for the third opening) is received while the image during power restoration is displayed, a predetermined power restoration is performed. Image data of the round effect image (predetermined round effect image), the number of rounds suggestion image ("ROUND3") corresponding to the predetermined round designation command (open third round designation command), and the right-handed promotion image. Image data is drawn and displayed.

That is, before the round production image (video of the character running toward the destination) for the 4R normal jackpot game displayed in the 1R round game that was executed when the power was cut off, before the round designation command. A jackpot type suggestion image (character image of "BONUS") that suggests the jackpot type that was displayed based on the received low-accuracy non-time saving game state designation command and opening designation command, and an image of the effect symbol at the time of the jackpot (effect). The image of the symbol "2") and the total number of acquired balls ("015 / 600pt") that informs the winning count value of the game ball to the large winning opening 13a are not displayed.

After the power is restored, the LEDs of the round number display 19i and the right-handed first display 19j of the first game information display device 19 are restarted, and the right-handed second display 20g of the second game information display device 20 is restarted. LED lighting is also resumed.

If a predetermined round designation command is received while the power restoration image is displayed, the jackpot is hit without displaying the predetermined power restoration round effect image (predetermined round effect image). An image notifying that there is may be displayed.

Specifically, for example, when a power failure occurs during the opening game of the 4R normal jackpot game, the power restoration designation command is received after the power restoration, the image during power restoration is displayed, and the image during power restoration is displayed. When the first round designation command for opening is received, an image notifying that a big hit is being made (only the character image of "big hit"), a right-handed promotion image, and a round number suggestion image are displayed. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, after the power is restored, the round designation command (for example, for the first opening) is first performed without receiving the power recovery designation command and the effect symbol designation command or the opening designation command. When the round designation command) is received, the round designation command displays the round number information of the number of round games to be started, so that the image data of the round number suggestion image is drawn.
However, since the round designation command does not show information about the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot), the jackpot type cannot be specified, the power recovery designation command and the game state designation command are not received, and the jackpot game Since the game state at that time is set to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, even if only the round designation command is received, it is unknown whether the game state was a big hit game state when the power was cut off. Therefore, it is not possible to draw the image data of the round effect image for power restoration, the jackpot type suggestion image, the right-handed promotion image, the effect pattern image at the time of the jackpot, and the total number of acquired balls image. The symbol, the jackpot type suggestion image, the right-handed promotion image, the effect symbol image at the time of the jackpot, and the total number of acquired balls image are not displayed.

Here, in displaying the round number suggestion image, it is necessary to display the background image that is the base of the round number suggestion image. The color bar image being displayed is a power restoration preparation image (startup image) indicating that the effect control board 130 has been activated (initial operation of the image control unit 140), and is not an image related to the effect display, so the display type is different. It is recognized that the color bar image and the round number suggestion image cannot be superimposed and drawn.
Therefore, when displaying the round number suggestion image, the power recovery information image and the base image image constituting the round number suggestion image and the power restoration in progress image which is not a problem as the background image of the layer lower than the round number suggestion image layer. The data is drawn. The image during power restoration is not an image related to the effect display of the jackpot game, but since it is an image related to the effect display of power restoration, it belongs to the image related to the effect display, so it is recognized as an image that can be drawn by superimposing it on the round number suggestion image. Will be done.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, the display image data drawn by superimposing the image data of the round number suggestion image and the image during power restoration (an image different from the round effect image) from the color bar image in the image display device 16 is obtained. Is displayed.
The background image of the round number suggestion image may be an image related to the effect display (for example, a background image in the normal mode) other than the image during power restoration.

In the above explanation, the image display control after the power is cut off and the power is restored when the variable display of the special symbol that is a big hit is performed has been described. When the power is cut off when the image is closed or when the customer is waiting, and the round designation command is first received without receiving the power recovery designation command after the power is restored, the main control board 110 is powered off. Since the game state at that time is memorized, even if the round number suggestion image and the power restoration image are displayed on the image display device 16, the big winning opening 13a is opened because it is not the big hit game state when the power is cut off. Not done.
Further, the LEDs of the round number indicator 19i and the right-handed first indicator 19j do not light up.

(Ending specification command)
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, when a power failure occurs during the 4th round game (during the final round game) in the 4R probability variation jackpot game and a power designation command is received after the power is restored, the image during power restoration is displayed. If the normal jackpot ending specification command is received while the power-restoring image is displayed, the power-restoring image is switched to the ending effect image.

In the ending effect image, an effect image for notifying the end of the jackpot game, an effect image for notifying the game state after the end of the jackpot game, an ending background image, and the like are displayed.
When displaying the ending effect image, it corresponds to the jackpot end effect pattern determined based on the jackpot type indicated by the ending specification command from among the multiple types of jackpot end effect patterns set for each jackpot type. Image data is drawn.

Specifically, when it is suggested that the ending specification command for the probability variation jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the character image of "Zan RUSH" and the image data of the background image in which the radial flash image spreads over the entire screen are drawn. , The ending effect image composed of these image data is displayed.
NS.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, when the ending designation command (for example, the ending designation command for probabilistic jackpot) is first received without receiving the power recovery designation command after the power recovery, the jackpot indicated by the ending designation command is received. The ending effect image corresponding to the jackpot end effect pattern determined based on the type of is displayed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the image display device 16 switches from the color bar image to the ending effect image.

In this way, regardless of whether the ending specification command is received after the power restoration specification command is normally received after the power restoration, or the ending specification command is first received without receiving the power restoration specification command. , The ending effect image corresponding to the jackpot end effect pattern determined based on the jackpot type indicated by the ending specification command is displayed.

(Error specification command)
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, a normal mode corresponding to the low probability non-time saving game state is set, the first holding number is "2" and the second holding number is "0". The power is cut off when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is produced based on the judgment result of the jackpot, and after the power is restored, the power restoration designation command is normally received and the power is being restored. When an error (for example, magnetic detection error) occurs after the image is displayed and an error specification command is received, the image data of the error type notification image corresponding to the error type indicated by the error specification command is drawn.

Since the error affects the desired performance of the gaming machine set at the time of manufacture / shipment, the error type notification image is set in the uppermost layer (L1). Therefore, when an error occurs, the display image data drawn by superimposing the image data of the error type notification image and the image data of the image displayed at the time of the error (here, the image during power restoration) is displayed. ..
Therefore, in the image display device 16, the error type notification image and the image displayed when the error occurs (here, the image during power restoration) are displayed.
Even if an error occurs and an error specification command is received when the jackpot effect image (opening effect image, round effect image for power restoration, ending effect image) is displayed after the power is restored, the error type notification image is also displayed. Is set in the uppermost layer (L1), and the display image data drawn by superimposing the image data of the error type notification image and the jackpot effect image is displayed.
After the power is restored, the error type notification image is set to the top layer (L1) even when an error occurs and an error specification command is received when an error is displayed when the initial image is displayed. , The display image data drawn by superimposing the image data of the error type notification image and the initial image is displayed.

Here, if there is a high possibility that the error is directly related to the cheating by the player among a plurality of types of errors and the error is of high importance that the player cannot directly cancel the error notification, an error is made in the center of the display screen. The type notification image is displayed.
Of the multiple types of errors, if the error is less likely to be directly related to fraud by the player and is less important for the player to directly cancel the error notification, an error will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The type notification image is displayed.

Unauthorized ball entry error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, etc. are high-importance errors that are likely to be directly related to the above-mentioned fraudulent activity by the player and that the player cannot directly cancel the error notification. be.
On the other hand, there are a door opening error, a dish full error, and the like as less important errors that are unlikely to be directly related to the above-mentioned fraudulent activity by the player and that the player can directly cancel the error notification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, even when the error designation command is first received without receiving the power recovery designation command after the power recovery, the error type notification image is set to the uppermost layer (L1). The image data of the error type notification image corresponding to the error type indicated by the error specification command is drawn.

Then, since the color bar image was displayed when the error designation command was received, the display image data drawn by superimposing the image data of the error type notification image and the color bar image is displayed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), when an error designation command for magnetic abnormality is received while the color bar image is displayed, an error type notification image of "instruction detection error" is received in the center of the display screen. And the color bar image is displayed on the entire screen.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the error specification command for full abnormality is received while the color bar image is displayed, the error type notification of "dish full tank error" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The color bar image is displayed on the image and the entire screen.

In this way, after power restoration, an error occurs regardless of whether the error specification command is received after receiving the power restoration specification command or the error specification command is first received without receiving the power restoration specification command. The type notification image is set in the uppermost layer (L1), and the error type notification image corresponding to the error type indicated by the error specification command is displayed, and the image displayed when the error occurs is displayed.

As explained above, after power restoration, if another command is received without receiving the power restoration specification command, or if the received command indicates the game status or jackpot type, new image data is drawn. Then, an image different from the image during power restoration is displayed, and on the other hand, if the received command does not indicate the game status or the type of jackpot, the color bar image is displayed for a long time from the time of power restoration. By continuing to do so, it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130.

After the power was restored, the special symbol memory specification command, fluctuation pattern specification command, special symbol confirmation command, opening specification command, round specification command, ending specification command, or error specification command was received without receiving the power-on specification command. The case is the same as the image display control described above.

After the power is restored, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses without receiving any command including the power restoration designation command, the image display device 16 displays the initial image (initial) of the display mode in the normal mode from the color bar image. Switch to the production pattern image and background image). At that time, since it is not a normal return, the display of the menu screen by the operation of the effect button 6a is prohibited (that is, the operation of the effect button 6a is invalid), or the execution of the customer waiting effect is prohibited.

(Image display control when an opening designation command is received from the main control board during fluctuation production)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an image display when an opening designation command is received from the main control board 110 during the variation effect.
Here, a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, and the loss effect symbol designation command and the loss variation received from the main control board 110 at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the loss determination result. The variation effect of the loss effect variation effect pattern in the normal mode based on the pattern specification command (for example, the special figure variation pattern specification 01 command) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 63A, the image display device 16 has a hold number display image in which the first hold number is “1” and the second hold number is “0”, and a hold icon in a display mode corresponding to the normal mode. The display image data drawn by superimposing the image, the variable icon image, the special symbol image, the effect symbol image, and the background image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), for some reason (noise is generated, the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is half-inserted or derailed, etc.) during the execution of the variation effect. When the opening designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image data of the opening effect image corresponding to the jackpot start effect pattern determined based on the jackpot type indicated by the opening designation command from among a plurality of types of jackpot start effect patterns is displayed. It is drawn. Therefore, in the image display device 16, the effect display image of the variation effect is switched to the opening effect image.
The first special symbol display 19a continuously displays the fluctuation of the special symbol (lighting and blinking display of the light emitting unit), while the second special symbol display 20a turns off the light emitting unit.
Even if the opening effect image is displayed, the large winning opening 13a is not opened because it is recognized that the main control board 110 is executing the variable display of the special symbol of loss.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol 1st display 19a is stopped while the opening effect image is still displayed without restarting the variation effect. When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of the operation, the effect symbol image and the opening effect of the display mode showing the determination result of the loss determined based on the loss effect symbol designation command received at the start of the fluctuation are displayed. The display image data drawn by superimposing the image data of the image is displayed.
The effect symbol image is set on a layer higher than the opening effect image, and the display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)" showing the determination result of loss in the state where the effect symbol image overlaps the opening effect image on the image display device 16. The effect symbol 16a of "6 (tiger)" is visibly displayed in the fixed stop state.

If the variable effect displayed on the image display device 16 is suddenly switched to the big hit opening effect image even though the effect symbol indicating the hit / loss determination result is not yet displayed, the player has some trouble in the game control. While it is possible to recognize that it has occurred, it is frustrating because it is not possible to grasp whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss. However, after that, the irritation of the player can be suppressed by displaying the three effect symbols 16a of the combination showing the determination result of hit / loss.

(Image display control when a round designation command is received from the main control board during fluctuation production)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an image display when a round designation command is received from the main control board during the variation effect.
Here, a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, and the loss effect symbol designation command and the loss variation received from the main control board 110 at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the loss determination result. The variation effect of the loss effect variation effect pattern in the normal mode based on the pattern specification command (for example, the special figure variation pattern specification 01 command) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 64A, the image display device 16 has a hold number display image in which the first hold number is “1” and the second hold number is “0”, and a hold icon in a display mode corresponding to the normal mode. The display image data drawn by superimposing the image, the variable icon image, the special symbol image, the effect symbol image, and the background image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), for some reason (noise is generated, the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is half-inserted or derailed, etc.) during the execution of the variation effect. When a round designation command is received from the main control board 110, a display drawn by superimposing the round number suggestion image and the power restoration in progress image which is the background image of the round number suggestion image based on the round number information indicated by the round designation command. Image data is displayed.
In the image display device 16, the display of the effect display image of the variation effect is switched to the display of the round number suggestion image and the image during power restoration.
In the first special symbol 1st display 19a, the variation display of the special symbol (LED lighting and blinking) is continuously performed, while in the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20a, the lit LED is turned off. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the first special is displayed in a state where the round number suggestion image, the power restoration information image, and the base image (power restoration in progress image) are displayed without restarting the fluctuation effect. When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the special symbol on the symbol 1st display 19a is stopped, the loss determined based on the loss effect symbol designation command received at the start of the variation is The display image data drawn by superimposing the effect symbol image of the display mode showing the determination result, the round number suggestion image, and the image during power restoration is displayed.
The effect symbol image is set in a layer higher than the round number suggestion image and the power restoration image, and the effect symbol image is added to the round number suggestion image, the power restoration information image, and the base image (power restoration image) in the image display device 16. The effect symbol 16a of the display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 6 (tiger)" showing the determination result of loss in the overlapping state is visibly displayed in the fixed stop state.

In the fluctuation effect displayed on the image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a indicating the determination result of hit / loss is not yet displayed, but suddenly the number of rounds suggestion image, power restoration information image, and base image (image during power restoration). When switched to, the player can grasp that some trouble has occurred in the game control, but is frustrated because he / she cannot grasp whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss. However, after that, the player's irritation can be eliminated by displaying the effect symbol 16a indicating the hit / loss determination result.

(Image display control when an ending specification command is received from the main control board during fluctuation production)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an image display when an ending designation command is received from the main control board during the variation effect.
Here, a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, and the loss effect symbol designation command and the loss variation received from the main control board 110 at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the loss determination result. The variation effect of the loss effect variation effect pattern in the normal mode based on the pattern specification command (for example, the special figure variation pattern specification 01 command) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 65A, the image display device 16 has a hold number display image in which the first hold number is “1” and the second hold number is “0”, and a hold icon in a display mode corresponding to the normal mode. The display image data drawn by superimposing the image, the variable icon image, the special symbol image, the effect symbol image, and the background image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), for some reason (noise is generated, the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is half-inserted or derailed, etc.) during the execution of the variation effect. When the ending designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image data of the ending effect image of the jackpot end effect pattern determined from a plurality of types of jackpot end effect patterns is drawn based on the jackpot type indicated by the ending designation command. NS.
Therefore, the image display device 16 switches from the effect display image of the variation effect to the ending effect image.
In addition, while the first special symbol 1st display 19a continuously displays the fluctuation of the special symbol (lighting and blinking display of the light emitting unit), the LED that was lit on the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20a is displayed. Turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol 1st display 19a is completed in the state where the ending effect image is still displayed without restarting the variation effect. When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 at the time of operation, an effect symbol image in a display mode showing a loss determination result determined based on the loss effect symbol designation command received at the start of the fluctuation, and an ending effect image. The display image data drawn by superimposing and is displayed.
The effect symbol image is set on a layer higher than the ending effect image, and the display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit)" showing the determination result of loss in the state where the effect symbol image overlaps the ending effect image on the image display device 16. The effect symbol 16a of "6 (tiger)" is visibly displayed in the fixed stop state.

If the effect symbol 16a indicating the hit / loss determination result is not yet displayed in the variation effect displayed on the image display device 16 but suddenly switches to the ending effect image, the player has some trouble in the game control. While it is possible to grasp what has been done, it is frustrating because it is not possible to grasp whether the fluctuation was a hit or a loss. However, after that, the player's irritation can be eliminated by displaying the effect symbol 16a indicating the hit / loss determination result.

As explained above, when the color bar image is displayed when the power is restored after the power is cut off, and the power restoration specification command is not received normally and a command other than the power restoration specification command is received, When the received command includes information about the game state, the type of the effect mode corresponding to the game state can be specified. Therefore, the effect symbol image and the background image of the display mode corresponding to the specified type of the effect mode can be specified. Image data can be drawn.
Further, when the other received commands include information on the type of jackpot, the image data of the jackpot effect (opening effect, ending effect) of the display mode corresponding to the type of jackpot can be drawn.
On the other hand, when the other received commands do not include information about the game state, the type of the effect mode cannot be specified. Therefore, the image data of the effect symbol image and the background image of the display mode corresponding to the type of the effect mode can be obtained. I can't draw.

(Ramp control unit main processing)
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the lamp control unit 150.
When power is supplied to the lamp control unit 150 by the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the lamp CPU 150a, and the lamp CPU 150a performs the following main processing.
The lamp CPU 150 performs the initialization process in step S3000, then the abnormality determination process in step S3001, the accessory effect execution determination process in step S3002, the accessory effect effect process in step S3003, the light emission effect process in step S3004, and step S3005. In, the button effect processing is sequentially performed. After that, the processes of steps S3001 to S3005 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt is generated.

In the abnormality determination process of step S3001, it is determined whether or not various error detection signals have been input from the main control board 110 (whether or not an error has occurred), and when it is determined that the error detection signals have been input, The error flag is set to "ON".

(Initialization process)
FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating the initialization process by the lamp control unit 150.
The lamp CPU 150a performs an initialization process when the power is turned on. In this process, the lamp CPU 150a sequentially performs the accessory initial operation process in step S3010, the light emission initial operation process in step S3011, and the effect button initial operation process in step S3012, and then initializes to the effect control board 130 in step S3013. Send a signal.

(Initial operation processing of the character)
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating the initial operation processing of the accessory by the lamp control unit 150.
First, in step S3020, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation timer is counting.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the initial operation timer is counting (step S3020; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a shifts the process to step S3023.

If the lamp CPU 150a determines in step S3020 that the initial operation timer is not counting (step S3020; No), the lamp CPU 150a starts the countdown of the initial operation timer in step S3021. The initial operation timer is set to, for example, 120 seconds.
Next, in step S3022, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation prohibition flag of the movable effect members 17A to 17C to "ON".

In step S3023, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the standby positions, respectively.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that each of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is in the standby position (step S3020; Yes), the process shifts to step S3025, and the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17A to When it is determined that any of 17C is not in the standby position (step S3023; No), the process is transferred to step S3024.

In step S3024, the lamp CPU 150a performs a return operation process. In this process, for example, when the first movable effect member 17a is not in the standby position, that is, when the blade portion 17a2 is not housed in the sheath portion 17a1, the lamp CPU 150a causes the blade portion 17a2 to be housed in the sheath portion 17a1. The blade portion 17a2 is returned to the operation.

In step S3025, the lamp CPU 150a sets a predetermined initial operation pattern for initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, respectively. The initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.
Next, in step S3026, the lamp CPU 150a starts the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C according to the initial operation pattern set in step S3025 (start of driving the stepping motor).

Next, in step S3027, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C have been completed. In this process, it is determined whether or not all the initial operations related to the initial operation pattern are completed based on the timer counter that measures the initial operation period (for example, 30 seconds) of the accessory determined in advance based on the initial operation pattern. ..
In the initial operation period of the accessory, the initial operation is performed after the initial operation of any of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the initial operation pattern in response to the power of the gaming machine 1 being turned on. All the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the pattern are performed, and the return operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C that have performed all the initial operations to the standby position is completed. It is the operating time of the accessory until it is played.

When the lamp CPU 150a determines in step S3027 that the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C have not been completed (step S3027; No), until the initial operation is completed (the initial operation period of the accessory). When it is determined that the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed by repeating the process of step S3027 (step S3027; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a is initially set in step S3028. It is determined whether or not the count value of the operation timer is "0".

In step S3028, when the lamp CPU 150a determines that the count value of the initial operation timer is not "0" (step S3028; No), the lamp CPU 150a performs the process of step S3028 until the count value of the initial operation timer becomes "0". When it is repeated and it is determined that the count value of the initial operation timer is "0" (step S3028; Yes), in step S2039, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation prohibition flag to "OFF" and initially sets the effect operation prohibition flag. End the operation process.

(Characteristic production execution judgment processing)
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating the accessory effect execution determination process by the lamp control unit 150.
First, in step S3030, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect operation permission flag is “ON” in the flag storage area.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect operation permission flag is "ON" (step S3030; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect execution determination process, and determines that the effect operation permission flag is not "ON" (step S3030). ; No), the process is transferred to step S3031. The effect operation permission flag is a state in which the effect operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C can be executed on the precondition that the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C have been completed. It shows that.

In step S3031, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect execution operation flag is “ON” in the flag storage area.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect execution operation flag is "ON" (step S3031; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect execution determination process, and determines that the effect operation execution flag is not "ON". (Step S3031; No), the process is transferred to step S3032.

In step S3032, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the variation effect accompanied by the effect operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the accessory effect is executed in the variation effect executed based on the variation effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 130.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the variation effect without the effect operation is executed (step S3032; No), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect execution determination process and determines that the variation effect accompanied by the effect operation is executed. (Step S3032; Yes), the process is transferred to step S3033.

In step S3033, the lamp CPU 150a sets an effect operation pattern for the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C to perform the effect operation in the variable effect to be executed. In this case, one effect operation pattern is set from a plurality of types of effect operation patterns based on the effect contents (presence / absence and type of reach, presence / absence and type of advance notice effect, etc.) of the variable effect to be executed. For each of the plurality of effect operation patterns, the type of the movable effect member, the content and operation time of the effect operation, the effect operation execution timing, and the like are defined in advance.
Next, in step S3034, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation permission flag to “ON” in the flag storage area, and ends the accessory effect effect execution determination process.

(Character production processing)
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating the accessory effect processing by the lamp control unit 150.
In step S3040, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the error flag is set to "ON" in the flag storage area in the abnormality determination process of step S3001 of FIG. 67.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the error flag is "ON" in the flag storage area, that is, an error has occurred (step S3040; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect processing without performing anything as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error flag is not "ON" (step S3040; No), the process is transferred to step S3041.

In step S3041, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect operation permission flag is “ON” in the flag storage area.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect operation permission flag is not "ON" (step S3041; No), the lamp CPU 150a shifts the process to step S3042.
In step S3042, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect execution operation flag is “ON” in the flag storage area. The effect operation executing flag indicates that the effect operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is started according to the effect operation pattern.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect execution operation flag is "ON" (step S3042; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a shifts the process to step S3047 and determines that the effect operation execution flag is not "ON" (step S3042). ; No), the character production process is completed.

When it is determined in step S3041 that the effect operation permission flag is "ON" (step S3041; Yes), the process is transferred to step S3043, and in step S3043, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not it is the effect operation execution timing. .. As a predetermined effect operation execution timing corresponding to the effect content of the variable effect to be executed, for example, a timing after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a (for example, After the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started, a special effect image (for example, the timing when the battle effect, the mission effect, etc. are displayed), the timing when the notice effect image is displayed, and the development notification image (for example, "Super Reach! ”) Is displayed, etc.), timing linked to the operation of the effect button 6a in the button operation effect, and the like.

When the lamp CPU 150a determines that it is not the effect operation execution timing (step S3043; No), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect process and determines that it is the effect operation execution timing (step S3043; Yes), the process is performed in step S3044. Transfer.
In step S3044, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation executing flag to “ON” in the flag storage area, and then in step S3045, the lamp CPU 150a sets the effect operation permission flag to “OFF”.

Next, in step S3046, the lamp CPU 150a starts the effect operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C according to the effect operation pattern set in step S3034 of the accessory effect effect execution determination process of FIG. , Operate the stepping motor of the panel drive device 17.
Next, in step S3047, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all the effect operations related to the effect operation pattern have been completed.
When the lamp CPU 150a determines that the effect operation pattern has not ended (step S3047; No), the lamp CPU 150a ends the accessory effect process and determines that the effect operation pattern has ended (step S3047; Yes), the lamp CPU 150a Set the effect operation in-execution flag to "OFF" in step S3048, and ends the accessory effect processing.

(Outline of initial operation pattern and effect operation pattern of movable effect member)
The operation modes of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are roughly classified into an initial operation and an effect operation.
The initial operation is an operation mode for confirming the effect operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C that is executed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, and the first to third movable effects are performed by the stepping motor. In order to control the effect operation of the members 17A to 17C, the position information for confirming whether or not the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are at the origin position is confirmed, and the stepping motor is operated to operate the first stepping motor. It is executed for the purpose of confirming whether or not the detection sensor is normally turned ON / OFF by operating the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C respectively.

On the other hand, the effect operation is a variation display of the effect symbol 16a in the variation effect on the premise that the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C according to the initial operation pattern have been executed and completed. And, it is executed for the purpose of exerting the effect of the accessory effect of operating / stopping the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C in conjunction with the stop display.

The initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are executed according to a predetermined initial operation pattern. In this initial operation, depending on the current positions of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C at the start of the initial operation, that is, whether or not the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the standby position. Different actions are performed depending on.

When the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are in the standby positions when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed based on a predetermined initial operation pattern. Be told.
Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the standby position of the first movable effect member 17A is such that the blade portions 17a2 and 17c2 are located at the upper part of the display unit of the image display device 16 (the upper part of the effect space 15A) and the sheath portions 17a1 and 17c1. It is in a stored state.
The standby position of the second movable effect member 17B is a state in which the upper part of the display unit of the image display device 16 (the upper part of the effect space 15A) is in front of the first movable effect member 17A.
The standby position of the third movable effect member 17C is a state in which the blade portion 17c2 is housed in the sheath portion 17c1 on the outside of the right outer edge of the display unit of the image display device 16 (the right portion of the effect space 15A).

As shown in FIG. 71 (1), the initial operation patterns of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are predetermined as initial operation 1 → initial operation 2 → initial operation 3 → initial operation 4 → initial operation 5. It is stipulated to confirm the effect operation to be executed during the variable effect in the order shown.
The initial operation 1 is an operation mode for confirming the operation of the first movable effect member 17A moving the blade portion 17a2 housed in the sheath portion 17a1 to the left from the standby position (see FIG. 72 (2)).
The initial operation 2 is an operation mode for confirming an operation in which the third movable effect member 17C moves upward from the standby position to the blade portion 17c2 housed in the sheath portion 17c1 (see FIG. 72 (4)).
The initial operation 3 is an operation mode for confirming an operation in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the central region of the display unit of the image display device 16 (see FIG. 72 (6)).
The initial operation 4 is an operation mode for confirming the operation of the third movable effect member 17C in which the blade portion 17c2 is pulled out from the sheath portion 17c1 from the standby position and tilted on the front side of the display unit of the image display device 16 (FIG. 72 (FIG. 72). 8)).
The initial operation 5 is an operation mode for confirming that each of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C performs the initial operation 1, the initial operation 2, and the initial operation 3 all at once from the standby position (FIG. 72 (10). )reference).

The "initial operation 1" corresponds to the "effect operation 1" executed in the variable effect, the "initial operation 2" corresponds to the "effect operation 2" executed in the variable effect, and the "initial operation 3" corresponds to the "effect operation 3". , Corresponds to the "effect operation 3" executed in the variable effect, the "initial operation 4" corresponds to the "effect operation 4" executed in the variable effect, and the "initial operation 5" is executed in the variable effect. Corresponds to the "directing operation 5".

As shown in FIG. 71 (2), when the variation effect of the variation effect pattern accompanied by the effect operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is executed, the effect operation 1 is performed at the start of the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 16a). (At the start), it is executed when the advance notice effect or reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is performed, and the effect action 2 and effect action 3 are executed when the advance notice effect or reach effect is performed. , The effect operation 4 is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect, and the effect operation 5 is executed as a jackpot determination effect.

Here, the "notice effect" is an effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be performed during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a. For example, the three effect symbols 16a are combined in a specific mode (for example, for example). By temporarily stopping in the combination display mode "246" (pseudo-ream chance eye)), which is not the combination display mode of reach loss, and by changing the three effect symbols 16a again (pseudo-ream fluctuation), the number of times is pseudo multiple times. There is a pseudo-continuous notice effect that makes it look like a variable display of the design is being performed. In this pseudo-continuous notice effect, it is suggested that the jackpot game is more likely to be performed as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation increases.

The "big hit confirmed effect" is before the three effect symbols 16a are confirmed and stopped displayed in the combination display mode showing the jackpot determination result (that is, before the determined symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the jackpot symbol). , It is a big hit notification effect that definitely notifies the player that it is a big hit.

The "big hit decision effect" is an effect in which the movable effect member performs an effect operation in response to the operation of the effect button 6a during the determined valid period that occurs during the variable effect to notify that the result is a jackpot determination result. It is a premium production with a high rarity value that has a lower occurrence rate than the above-mentioned jackpot confirmation production.
Since the effect operation 5 is performed as a jackpot determination effect, the player's uplifting feeling for the probability variation jackpot winning can be greatly enhanced by the premium effect operation 5 having a low occurrence rate and a high rare value.

(Initial operation mode and image display mode of movable effect member)
As shown in FIG. 72, (1) when the power of the gaming machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on, a color bar image is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device 16. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 73. After that, when the activation of the effect control board 130 (liquid crystal control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) is completed, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C are in the standby position. The initial operation is started (the start of the initial operation period of the accessory). This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 73.

As shown in FIG. 72 (2), first, the initial operation 1 by the first movable effect member 17A is performed, and (3) when the initial operation 1 is completed, the return operation of returning to the standby position is performed. At this time, the activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 normally receives the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110. In the image display device 16, the color bar image is switched to the image during power restoration. This corresponds to the ting T3 of FIG. 73.

Subsequently, (4) the initial operation 2 by the third movable effect member 17C is performed, (5) the return operation is performed when the initial operation 2 is completed, and then (6) the initial operation by the second movable effect member 17B. 3 is performed, (7) a return operation is performed when the initial operation 3 is completed, then (8) an initial operation 4 by the third movable effect member 17C is performed, and (9) a return operation is performed when the initial operation 4 is completed. The operation is performed, and then (10) the initial operation 5 by the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C is performed, and (11) the return operation is performed when the initial operation 5 is completed. Is performed, and all the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C related to the initial operation pattern are completed (end of the accessory initial operation period). This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 73. After that, in the image display device 16, when the display target period of the image during power restoration ends and the variation pattern designation command is received from the main control board 110, the display image of the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is switched. This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 73.
The LEDs of the panel lighting devices 18 provided on the movable effect members 17A to 17C are lit in a predetermined light emitting mode according to the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C.

As described above, the initial operation pattern of the movable effect member is defined so that at least one of the plurality of movable effect members performing the effect operation as the jackpot determination effect finally performs the initial operation. In the initial operation pattern of the movable effect members 17A to 17C of the present embodiment, it is defined that all of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C that perform the effect operation as the jackpot determination effect finally perform the initial operation. ..
The execution order of the initial operation 1 to the initial operation 4 in the initial operation pattern of the present embodiment is other than the order shown above (for example, the order of initial operation 2 → initial operation 1 → initial operation 4 → initial operation 3). However, the final initial operation must be the initial operation 5.

In executing the initial movements of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the initial operation corresponding to the effect operation having the lowest importance as the effect related to the special game determination among the various effect operations executed in the variable effect is started. After that, by performing the initial action corresponding to the most important effect action as the effect related to the special game determination at the end, the game that the last initial action is the most important effect effect. It becomes easier for the person to grasp.
Further, when the initial operation corresponding to the most important effect operation is performed first without the player recognizing that the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C has been started, the effect suddenly occurs. There is a risk of being surprised and overlooking the initial operation corresponding to the most important production operation. Further, if the initial operation corresponding to the most important effect operation is performed first, it may be misunderstood that the effect operation is being performed and it may not be possible to grasp that the initial operation is being executed.

Further, in the jackpot determination effect involving the operation of the effect button 6a, the player operates the effect button 6a with the expectation that the player will be a big hit while being excited about whether or not the player is a big hit. In addition, if the effect operation of the movable effect member is not normally performed in conjunction with the operation of the effect button 6a, the player may misunderstand that the effect is a loss, and the effect of the jackpot determination effect is reduced. Therefore, by performing the initial operation for confirming the effect operation of the movable effect member executed in the determined effect in the initial operation pattern at the end and confirming that it operates normally, the above-mentioned inconvenience is surely avoided. can do.

As shown in FIG. 74, for example, when a low-probability non-time-saving game state is set and the result is a loss determination result in the normal mode corresponding to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the loss fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (variation time: The variation effect pattern of the loss without reach corresponding to (8 seconds) is determined, and the normal variation effect of the variation effect pattern of the loss without reach (hereinafter, the normal variation effect of the loss without reach) is performed.

(A) The variable display of the three effect symbols 16a is started, and the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 75. (B) After the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 16a, the effect symbol 16a of "6 (tiger)" is temporarily stopped in the left side region. (C) The power supply is cut off while the effect symbol 16a fluctuates in the right side region and the center region. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 75. At the time of this timing T2, the effect elapsed time (variation display elapsed time of the special symbol) of the normal variation effect of the loss without reach is set to, for example, 4 seconds.

(D) When the power of the gaming machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on (power restoration), the activation processing of the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) is started. A color bar image is displayed on the image display device 16. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 75.

(E) When the activation of the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) is completed, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are started (start of the accessory initial operation period). .. This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 75. The initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed according to the above-mentioned predetermined initial operation pattern (FIG. 71 (1)).

(F) The activation of the main control board 110 is completed, and the effect control board 130 normally receives the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110. This corresponds to the timing T5 in FIG. 75. The image display device 16 switches from the color bar image to the image during power restoration. (G) The initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are continuously performed while the image during power restoration is being displayed. The power recovery screen shows the remaining production time (remaining fluctuation time) of the normal fluctuation effect of the reachless loss that was executed when the power was cut off (preset effect time (8 seconds) -power off from the start of fluctuation. It continues to be displayed until the elapsed time of the effect (4 seconds) = 4 seconds)) until the occurrence of.

(H) When the effect control board 130 receives the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the initial image ((“ 3 (rabbit) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)”) is displayed for a moment and immediately next. The effect display image of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of is displayed. This corresponds to the timing T6 in FIG. 75.
Even if the display image of the variable effect is displayed on the image display device 16, the initial operation is continuously performed until the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are completed. Here, at the time of timing T6 when the symbol confirmation display period ends, the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is the initial operation 1 of all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern. ~ 3 is completed.

(I) During the variable display of the three effect symbols 16a, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are continuously performed until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation patterns are completed. That is, at the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 16a, the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C do not perform the effect operation 1, but preferentially perform the initial operation.

(J) In the variable effect, the effect symbol 16a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped in the left area. This corresponds to the timing T7 in FIG. 75. At this time, the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed.

As described above, when the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are not completed during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, the initial operations are prioritized and the effect operations 1 to 5 are not performed. For example, even at the timing of performing the effect operation 2 corresponding to the advance notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, if the initial operation is not completed, the initial operation is prioritized and the effect operation 2 is not performed.

(Initial operation mode of the movable effect member when another command is received without normally receiving the power recovery designation command)
FIG. 76 shows an initial operation mode and an image display display mode of the movable effect members 17A to 17C when a special symbol memory designation command is received without normally receiving the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 after the power recovery. It is a figure explaining.
(A) When the power is cut off while waiting for customers, the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140) are turned on (power restored) without clearing the RAM. , The activation process of the lamp control unit 150) is started, and the color bar image is displayed on the image display device 16. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 77.

(B) When the activation of the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) is completed, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are started (start of the accessory initial operation period). .. A color bar image is displayed on the image display device 16. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 77.

(C) The start-up of the main control board 110 is completed, and for some reason (noise, half-insertion of the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, derailment, etc.), the effect control board 130 When the special symbol storage designation command is received without receiving the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110, the color bar image is continuously displayed. The initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is continuing. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 77.
The initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are all initial operations related to the initial operation pattern regardless of whether or not the effect control board 130 normally receives the power restoration designation command from the main control board 110. This is continued until steps 1 to 5 are completed. After that, (d) the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed (finished), but the color bar image is still displayed. This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 77.

In this way, when the special symbol memory designation command is received without normally receiving the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 after the power recovery, the effect control board 130 (lamp control unit 150) regardless of the type of the received command. ) Starts the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, and continues until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern are completed.

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an initial operation mode of the movable effect member and a display mode of an image display when a round designation command is received without normally receiving the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 after the power recovery. be.
(A) When the power is cut off while waiting for customers, the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140, lamp control unit 140) are turned on when the power of the gaming machine 1 without RAM clear is turned on. The activation process of 150) is started, and the color bar image is displayed on the image display device 16. This corresponds to the timing T1 in FIG. 79.

(B) When the activation of the effect control board 130 (image control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) is completed, the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C are started (start of the accessory initial operation period). .. This corresponds to the timing T2 in FIG. 79.

(C) The start-up of the main control board 110 is completed, and for some reason (noise, half-insertion of the command wiring (connector) between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, derailment, etc.), the effect control board 130 When the round designation command is received without receiving the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110, the round number suggestion image and the power recovery in progress image are displayed. The initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is continuing. This corresponds to the timing T3 in FIG. 79.
After that, (d) the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is completed (finished), but the image suggesting the number of rounds and the image during power restoration are still displayed. This corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 79.

In this way, when the number of rounds designation command is received without normally receiving the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 after the power recovery, the effect control board 130 (lamp control unit 150) regardless of the type of the received command. The initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is started by the activation of, and is continuously performed until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern are completed.

In addition to the above description, even if another command is received without normally receiving the power restoration designation command after the power restoration, the first to first operations are started by starting the effect control board 130 (lamp control unit 150). 3 The initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started, and is continuously performed until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern are completed.

Specifically, as described in FIG. 55 above, when the fluctuation pattern specification command is received without normally receiving the power restoration specification command after the power restoration (see FIG. 57), the power restoration specification command is normally executed. When the opening designation command is received without receiving (see FIG. 59) or when the ending designation command is received without normally receiving the power recovery designation command (see FIG. 61), the effect control board 130 (lamp control unit 150). ) Starts the initial operations of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, and continues until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern are completed.

After the power is restored, regardless of the type of command received from the main control board 110, the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C is started by the activation of the effect control board 130 (lamp control unit 150), and the initial operation is started. It is continuously performed until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the operation pattern are completed. That is, in the initial operation of the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, regardless of whether or not the effect control board 130 normally receives the power restoration designation command from the main control board 110, the effect control board 130 (lamp). It is started by the activation of the control unit 150), and is continuously performed until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern are completed regardless of the image display content of the image display device 16.

In the above description, the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started when the power is restored from the power failure and the start of the effect control board 130 (lamp control unit 150) is completed. The initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C may be started when the activation of is completed.

Even in this case, regardless of whether the power is restored from the power failure and any of the commands other than the power restoration designation command and the power restoration designation command is received, the movable effect member 17A to the movable effect member 17A to the activation of the main control board 110. The initial operation of 17C is started, and is continuously performed until all the initial operations 1 to 5 related to the initial operation pattern are completed.

As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the color bar image is displayed when the power is restored from the power off, and the power is being restored when the power restoration designation command is normally received while the color bar image is displayed. When the image is switched to and the special symbol memory specification command is received after receiving the power recovery specification command, the hold icon image that notifies the number of judgment information indicated by the special symbol memory specification command is drawn but not displayed. While the image during power restoration is displayed in, if the power restoration specification command is not received normally and the special symbol storage specification command is received while the color bar image is displayed, the judgment indicated by the special symbol storage specification command is made. Hold icon to inform the number of information The color bar image is displayed without drawing the image.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power off, the color bar image is displayed, and when the power restoration designation command is normally received while the color bar image is displayed, the image is switched to the image during power restoration. When a fluctuation pattern specification command is received after receiving the power recovery specification command, the fluctuation pattern is changed based on the fluctuation pattern specification command from the image during power restoration. If the power recovery specification command is not received normally and the fluctuation pattern specification command is received while the color bar image is displayed, the fluctuation is based on the fluctuation pattern specification command from the color bar image without displaying the image during power restoration. It switches to the variable production of the production mode according to the game state in which the pattern is changed.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power off, the color bar image is displayed, and when the power restoration designation command is normally received while the color bar image is displayed, the image is switched to the image during power restoration. Even if a special symbol confirmation command is received after receiving the power recovery specification command, the image during power recovery is continuously displayed, but the power recovery specification command is not received normally when the color bar image is displayed. When the special symbol confirmation command is received, the color bar image is continuously displayed without displaying the image during power restoration.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power off, the color bar image is displayed, and when the power restoration designation command is received while the color bar image is displayed, the image is switched to the image during power restoration and the power is restored. If an opening specification command is received while the medium image is displayed, the image is switched to the opening effect image according to the type of jackpot indicated by the opening specification command, while the power recovery specification command is issued when the color bar image is displayed. If the opening designation command is received without normal reception, the color bar image is switched to the opening effect image according to the type of jackpot indicated by the opening designation command without displaying the image during power restoration.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power off, the color bar image is displayed, and when the power restoration designation command is normally received while the color bar image is displayed, the image is switched to the image during power restoration. If a round designation command is received while the power restoration image is displayed, a predetermined round production image is displayed, and a round number suggestion image corresponding to the predetermined number of round games indicated by the round designation command, right. While the boosting promotion image is displayed, if the power recovery specification command is not received normally and the round specification command is received while the color bar image is displayed, the power is supplied from the color bar image without displaying the power recovery image. The image being restored and the image suggesting the number of rounds corresponding to the predetermined number of round games indicated by the round designation command are displayed.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power off, the color bar image is displayed, and when the power restoration designation command is normally received while the color bar image is displayed, the image is switched to the image during power restoration. If an ending specification command is received while the image being restored to power is displayed, the image is switched to the ending effect image according to the type of jackpot indicated by the ending specification command, while the power restoration specification is specified when the color bar image is displayed. If the ending specification command is received without receiving the command normally, the ending effect image according to the type of jackpot indicated by the ending specification command is displayed from the color bar image without displaying the image during power restoration.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power off, the color bar image is displayed, and when the power restoration designation command is received while the color bar image is displayed, the image is switched to the image during power restoration and the power is restored. Error after receiving the specified command When the specified command is received, the error type notification image corresponding to the error type indicated by the error specified command is displayed on top of the image during power restoration, while the color bar image is displayed. If an error specification command is received without receiving the power recovery specification command, an error type notification image corresponding to the error type indicated by the error specification command is displayed on top of the color bar image.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power failure and the activation of the effect control board 130 is completed, the initial operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started, and other than the power restoration designation command and the power restoration designation command. Regardless of whether any of the other commands (special symbol memory specification command, variation pattern specification command, special symbol confirmation command, opening specification command, round specification command, or ending specification command) has been received, the initial operation pattern is related. It is continuously performed until all the initial operations 1 to 5 are completed.

In this way, when the power is restored from the power off, the color bar image is displayed, and when the power restoration specification command is received while the color bar image is displayed, the image is switched to the image during power restoration, while the color bar image is displayed. When the power restoration specification command is not received and other commands other than the power restoration specification command are received, the color bar image is continuously displayed without switching to the image during power restoration, or the image is different from the image during power restoration. Since the switching is performed, it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130.

When the power restoration designation command is received after the power is restored from the power interruption, an image of the display mode corresponding to the game state at the time of the power interruption occurrence indicated by the power restoration designation command can be drawn.
On the other hand, when the power recovery designation command is not received and other commands other than the power recovery designation command are received, the contents of the received control command are analyzed and the game status information (game information) is included. Since it is possible to specify the effect mode corresponding to the gaming state, it is possible to draw an image of the display mode corresponding to the specified effect mode. Further, when the received control command includes information on the type of jackpot, it is possible to draw a jackpot effect image (opening effect image or ending effect image) in a display mode according to the type of jackpot. Further, when the received control command is an error specification command, an error type notification image corresponding to the error type indicated by the error specification command can be drawn.

According to this embodiment, the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 (effect control unit 130 m, image control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) in the gaming machine 1 can be more smoothly linked.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used for rotating cylinder type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for pachinko and pachinko machines.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine 16 Image display devices 17A to 17C Movable effect member 110 Main control board 130 Effect control board 130 m Effect control unit 140 Image control unit 150 Lamp control unit

Claims (1)

It has a variable winning means that can change the game ball launched into the game area into an open state in which a winning can be won, executes a variable display of the symbol when the starting condition is satisfied, and when the variable display becomes a special result, the variable winning means. In a gaming machine capable of performing a special game in which a round game is performed multiple times in an open state.
The main control means that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with an effect control means for controlling the effect using the effect execution means.
The main control means
An acquisition means for acquiring judgment information when the acquisition conditions are satisfied, and
A storage means that can store the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means that can store the determination information.
A holding means that can store and retain game information even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped and the power is cut off.
It has a transmission means for transmitting control commands, and
The effect executing means displays an effect image based on the control command, and displays the effect image.
The main control means can transmit a first control command based on the game information stored and held in the holding means when the power is supplied to the gaming machine from the power interruption state, and the special game It is possible to send a second control command indicating that the game is executed and a third control command indicating that the predetermined number of round games are executed.
The effect executing means is
When the power is cut off and the power is turned on, the first image is displayed.
When the first control command is received while the first image is being displayed, the display is switched to the second image, and when the second control command is received while the second image is being displayed, the second image is displayed. While switching to the display of the notification image that notifies that the special game is executed according to the control command,
If the first control command is not received and the second control command is received while the first image is being displayed, the second control command is displayed from the display of the first image without displaying the second image. Switch to the display of the notification image that notifies that the special game will be executed according to
When the first control command is received while the first image is being displayed, the display is switched to the second image, and when the third control command is received while the second image is being displayed, a predetermined round is displayed. While switching to the display of the production image,
When the first control command is not received and the third control command is received while the first image is displayed, the round effect image is changed from the display of the first image without displaying the second image. Switch to a different image display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images